Home
        PHILIPS m3, m4 Patient Monitor Service Manual
         Contents
1.                                                               DRAINWIRE   3  2                                  VA      oa    oe    88 uc A  VA gm  D a e  gt          LLIE  VA 4       ma          Z       lt      Wo o 3  Z     oN  N 2     21       5 LENGTH   SEE DWG  B 5021 7592 2  m       o                o        WIRE PRESS IN WITH SPECIAL TOOL  INSERTION TOOL S  KRONE LSA Plus   P N  M3086 43801             L       WIRING SCHEMATIC       POS  1 16 PRESS IN WITH TOOL    DRAINWIRE  2    DRAINWIRE  2                              ee    BLACK GREEN  WHITE GRAY  RED WHITE  RED   BROWN  WHITE BROWN  BLUE  WHITE BLUE              WHITE BLACK  BLACK  GRAY   VIOLETT   WHITE VIOLETT   GREEN   WHITE GREEN                   12      9 8                        8    Step 4  schematic above     Installing the Instrument    9 10 112 13 4 5 16 17                         12345678              BLACK GREEN  WHITE GRAY  RED WHITE  RED   BROWN  WHITE BROWN  BLUE  WHITE BLUE                                                                                                          e         WIRE PRESS IN WITH SPECIAL TOOL    17 18      0000                                                 12345678    9 10 11 12 13 4    16      gt                             INSERTION TOOL S  KRONE LSA Plus  P N  M3086 43801          Use a small screwdriver to connect the two drain wires to the PCB  see the wiring    113    MSL Cable Termination    Step 5 Slide the PCB back on to the metallic mounting flange   Step 6 Us
2.                            20  Measurement Server Theory of Operation                                        21  Functional Description of the Measurement Server Hardware                        22  Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement                           23  DESCHIPUOM                  EE 23  IVIC      MOMS uo             ecco tue eoe aot rct psu Wiel ark acetic a ea      Wid ae scabies 23  FEOIR SPE CaS a TITIO TO TTL T         TR 24  block  Diasram ot the                 i ok eaa d ore A      25  Theon ob                         ees ME de det dad Ae          ee    25  Non invasive Blood Pressure          Measurement                                 29   DOSCPIDUODD               Died          ota hie deben d nci           29   Me dS Uere Ds                                           ee      a ditus 29                       29  Block  Di  sram TOL NBP   24 dx rra bun d deg rasa         as      3l  Sonn                                   heres 31         Measurement                   5                                               32  Theory Of                       s buen de        52  Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO  PLETH  Measurement                   33         15 ei urat eite dn ey        techs                                     33  Measure MENS ernea ILIO OTI OI TI                       33  SPOJPLELH Features Gasp tea adele SURE ToR RUE wate EODD ead wee 33  Block Diagram of the SpO  PLETH Circuit              0 0 00    eee ee ee ee 34  Th
3.                            273   Battery and Battery Related                                                    274  Batic Pats                 274  Battery EF xchanee                        ESE dod VICI DR RE ICE de id 274  Battery Charger and Conditioner Parts                            eee ees 274   XE 50p Recorder Exchange Parts                                             274  Contents      Introduction to the Instrument       Objectives    In order to meet this chapter   s goals  you should become familiar with the Monitor   Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extensions  and be able to identify their  component parts in some detail  As well  you should be able to explain how the Measurement  Server and Measurement Server Extensions acquire and process physiological measurements  and how the Monitor displays the data     The following topics are covered in this chapter     Introducing the Instrument Components  e Section 1   Monitor Description    Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware  e Section 2   Measurement Server Description and Features    Measurement Server Theory of Operation    Functional Description of the Measurement Server Hardware    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    Non invasive Blood Pressure  NBP  Measurement    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO2 PLETH  Measurement    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement      Section 3   Measurement Server Extensions Description and Features    M
4.                   155  Temperature ACCUEIOY  eda ace ert bat                        155              Perlormanee                       pa 155    Contents xi    Invasive Pressure Performance     5                         cece rs 156    SpOs Petlonmance Test  4506 220 ace e Dis           157  Mainstream  C O5 Performance Test                  IE Eb      157  Nurse Call Relay Performance Test                                         157  BCG  Syne Perormance  Vest  ux wuss               158  Patient Safety                                   Bo ee e oin o n      Gh               we      159  Warnings  Cautions  and Safety Precautions                                  159  Salety Test Procedures               ete debat Nb iae od noe ur t oh bd eck a ee a ate 159  Tutorial  tor Tesune the Instrument   12a weet ele    eee hee  163  Answers to the Tutorial for Testing the                                              164  5 Troubleshooting the Instrument                             165        165  CONCEDIS         Gees uud SH eae eh ote      165  Part 1 Troubleshooting              5i u   222605 Gio de ROO e Mica DE 166  Checks for Obvious Problems                                             166  Checks Before Opening the Instrument                                      166   HU SC DS                 eed    173  Initial Instrument Boot Phase                                              173  Isolating Problems to the Correct Subassembly                                175  Part 2 Isolating 
5.           8   ES                       LED Current  current  Source    Rtype  RCode  Rlambd Measurement                              To  amp  From SpO2 Transducer       Theory of Operation    The signals progress through the circuit as follows     LED Current Source  This generates the LED current from a constant voltage provided by the power supply  A    bridge consisting of four transistors switches the LED current for driving the red and infrared  LEDs  These switching transistors are controlled by the SpO  CPU     Photo Amplifier  The photo amplifier is an active input current to voltage converter  The input signal is filtered    by alow pass filter to eliminate higher frequencies generated  for example  by electro surgery  units  Then the input current from the photo diode of the sensor is converted to a voltage     Clipping Detector  A comparator detects clipping of the photo amplifier signal caused by  for example  ambient    light  The clipping detection is connected directly to the SpO  CPU to generate an INOP if  necessary     Introduction to the Instrument    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO  PLETH  Measurement    Bandpass    The bandpass stage contains a bandpass filter for the modulated signals coming in from the  photo amplifier  This filters out noise outside a passband centred on the modulation  frequency     Variable Gain    This section amplifies the incoming signals  The gain is set by a digital to analog converter   DAC  which allows 512 gain sett
6.          5   Theory of Operation for M3015A Sidestream CO  0    51  M3016A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation                        53  Functional Description of the M3016A Measurement Server Extension Hardware        54  Hardware Block Diagrami   uui die cer        55  Mainstream       Vleasure melt 2s ecce mtt Ro ESL RP AS ERAS               sees ex 56  DESCEDEO        tur uS TA cct ane a E 56           US dor ica t uod dope eerte Ehe hol nett ete                                oes ue    56  Mainstream CO  Features    scio d exe bye ceed heehee SASS reese eee iss d LEES 57  Block Diagram of the Mainstream        measurement                            59  Theory of Operation for the M3016A Mainstream CO       60  Tutorial for the Introduction to the Instrument                                     61  Answers to the Tutorial for the Introduction to the Instrument                        62  2 Installing Che   1   lt   amp            amp                                      63  e a      ums saut MUI      he ue a M Mc a he         EM d eek 63  OMG SPs athe eme DPA a          Gs Gh      ee a        63  Das geo ib as ee re es oe              64  Pale        erroen eene             utatur A a rc deere               64  Patient Leakage Current  2212554    x termes Exe exse  EY ecu 64  Prepare  to Install the Montor os pci piro dE acp d e OR    pr CE d Oe      64  Power Source Reque melts  n ue        Ea ERE qe aie Mansit 64  Protecting against Electric Shock a0 ess usu
7.         40                     XM    Measurement Mode    Wave Range    Calibration Marks       In the measurement mode  the Extension continuously measures        concentration   calculates medical parameters and exchanges information with the Server via FELP            Correction    This can be turned on or off  If    0 correction is off  only oxygen cor   rection to CO   is made  In this case  it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mainly of       and      respiratory intensive care unit conditions      If N5O correction is on  oxygen and    0 correction to the CO   value is made  In this case     it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mainly of O5 and    0  operating room condi   tions      Introduction to the Instrument 49    Sidestream        Measurement    50       0 correction is required only on M3015A Measurement Server Extensions with CO   Data  Acquisition hardware revision    01 09 or lower            Correction    This can be turned on or off  If N5O correction is off  only oxygen cor   rection to       is made  In this case  it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mainly of       and N   respiratory intensive care unit conditions      If       correction is on  oxygen and    0 correction to the CO   value is made  In this case   it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mainly of O  and N5O  operating room condi   tions     e O  Correction    There is a fixed correction of 45            Humidity Correction    This correction is selectable between
8.       Go into the Status Log and check whether either the Monitor or the Server reports a fatal  error     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Using Service Mode      Print out the Status Log in which the error is reported     To ensure the fault is not a single  sporadic  fault  you should rerun the coldstart sequence   including clearing the Status Logs        If a fatal error is again reported  either the System Board or the Server should be replaced   Please include the printed Status Log with the exchanged parts     Display Test    This test is a non destructive  visual test of the SGRAM video memory  From left to right  top  to bottom a small square consisting of colored bars moves over the whole screen during  approximately 30 seconds  During this test  the memory content of the video display   consisting of small blocks of memory  is read into other memory and stored  Then the  memory blocks are filled with a colored bar pattern  cleared again  and then recovered with  the previously stored data  The tested display then reverts to the pre test state     The test continues until either it is switched off or Service Mode is exited     Success    The test is passed if the display has reverted to the pre test state once the test has  passed over the whole screen once   Be aware that numerics are updated also during a  running display test  This should not be considered a fault     Failure   tThe test is failed if the display has not reverted to the pre test state once the t
9.       H31V3H                                               NOILISOd  YOLVYVdNOO               3SVHd HOLOIN  YOLOW     NOILVIND3Y  svig                       x                ZV    305 390     any             3401         Ad           INdNI OO                   YOLOALAC  dl                Svo       t    CS    AOYNOS ul    59    Introduction to the Instrument    Mainstream CO  Measurement    Theory of Operation for the M3016A Mainstream CO     The signals progress through the circuit as follows     Microprocessor    This is in overall control of the mainstream        measurement functions  As well  it performs  the following functions     e Serial communication  via optocouplers     Calculation of the calibration constants     Calculation of the raw data of the mainstream CO  waveform     Temperature Sensor  Amplifier  AIO  Heater Control and Heater    The temperature of the transducer is maintained at approximately 43  C to prevent  condensation and to negate any discrepancies due to temperature changes  Signals from the  temperature sensor in the transducer are amplified and then passed through an Analog to   Digital converter  The microprocessor then adjusts the output of the heater control  accordingly     Sense Coil  Motor Phase Comparator  Counters  Motor Drive  Drive Coil    The rotations of the chopper wheel in the transducer are regulated to 40 rotations per second   The sense coil together with the motor phase comparator and the counters are used to  measure the actua
10.       M3016A Measurement Server Extension  The Measurement Server Extension for mainstream CO  measurement  M3016A  includes       Measurements of mainstream CO    and Press Temp  e Signal and alarm processing        M3016A  A01 only      Features    The Measurement Server Extensions have the following general features     Data Management    The combination of the Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension features  also Patient Data Management for CO   and the second Pressure Temp  This consists of  continuous 4 hour storage of patient related measurement information  This allows you to do  the following       Manage patient information      View patient data in graphs or tables via the Monitor      Print patient information reports to a local printer via the Monitor     Transfer data between Monitors     Introduction to the Instrument    M3015A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation    Settings Transfer    The combination of the Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension can be  transported from one Monitor to another and still keep its measurement settings  The settings   such as alarm limits  are stored in the Measurement Server  This behaviour permits fast and  easy transport    Alarms Reset    The Measurement Server Extension responds to the Silence Reset key on the Measurement  Server which allows you to silence alarm tones  while retaining visual alarm messages   depending on your Monitor   s configuration      Server to Monitor Lin
11.      HR Limit                                                         gt     gt        2   Alarm      vo   ECG Controls   ECG User     From   Controls S  ECG Resp    CPU Resp Artifact      Wave     Suppression e       Resp Rate B   _  gt      Detector            A       Resp Alarming         c   Resp Controls        gt          Display Filter and Scaling  This software receives the raw ECG wave with pace pulse information from the ECG Resp  CPU  The pace pulse spikes are removed from the ECG before filtering  and re inserted  after filtering with their original shape  the filtering would distort them otherwise    Software filters remove line frequency  50 60Hz   high frequency noise  artifacts and  baseline wander   The waves are scaled automatically or manually as set by the user   The defibrillator marker is superimposed on the ECG wave to be displayed   ECG waves are communicated to the display unit via the operating system     Cardiotach   This software derives the averaged value of the heart rate  Pace pulses and undershoots are  removed from the signal  The multi channel QRS detector generates beat identification tags  for the cardiotach  The detection algorithm weights noisy ECG channels less than channels  with clear signals  The cardiotach measures the time between two detected QRS complexes  and calculates a beat to beat and averaged heart rate  The heart rate is communicated to the  ECG Alarming software  and to the display unit via the operating system     Introdu
12.      scrubber  if After 15 000 to 20 000 hours of    required  units with serial number use  max  20 000 hours  or as    prefix DEO20xxxxx only  needed  typically 3   6 years of  use   Replace both parts at the    same time if both have  gt 15 OOO  hours of continuous use     Calibration Procedures Once a year   Testing Procedures  See  Testing the Instrument      Preventive Maintenance for the M3016A   Measurement Server Extension   e Cleaning procedures  Clean as needed    e Testing Procedures  See  Testing the Instrument        Battery conditioning Approximately every 50 charge dis    completely discharge the battery  charge cycles        120 Maintaining the Instrument    Maintenance Checklist    Maintenance Checklist    Check E   See  Topics in this Chapter    Inspecting the Instrument  FC   Inspect Cables  Cords and Housing 122      Maintenance Tasks     __  Replacing the Backlight Tube Assembly              Replacing the Backlight Tube Assembly   Backlight Tube Assembly    M3000A M3001A NBP Calibration and Perform   ance tests    M3015A    e Replacement of the Pump and CO2 Scrubber   units with serial number prefix DEO20xxxxx only     e Sidestream CO  Performance Test    General Cleaning of the Instrument    ee eee     Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    Oneness 0     ome         eoo      Instrument Tests for Functionality Assurance  Preventive  Maintenance  Performance and Safety Tests         Testing the Instrument       Maintaining the Instrument 121 
13.     Intermittent connection  to Recorder or faulty  cable     Communication error     Intermittent connection  to Recorder or faulty  cable     Frame error in RS232  protocol  due to a  connection problem or  effects of interference  from external electrical  equipment  such as  flourescent lighting      Software problem  not  correctable in the field   Replace the Recorder       Check cable connection  15 secure between the  Monitor and the  Recorder     Check cable  and replace  if necessary     Check cable connection  15 secure between the  Monitor and the  Recorder     If connection is sound   but the problem persists   replace the cable     Check cable connection  15 secure between the  Monitor and the  Recorder     If connection 1s sound   but the problem persists   replace the cable     If there 15 electrical  interference from  external equipment  try to  isolate the cause  and if  possible repair or remove  the cause of the  interference        195    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems       Local Recorder   Recorder door is open  Close the door   door open  sta    The Recorder is availa   tus message ble  but 1s not ready for   recording      Local Recorder   The Recorder 1  out of Load paper into the   out of paper  paper  Recorder  refer to the   status message   The Recorder 1s availa  Operator 5 Manual for the  ble  but 1s not ready for XE 50p Chart Recorder  recording  for details      No Local The printhead 1  too warm   Switch off the Recorder  
14.     Step1 Slide the battery compartment door toward the rear of the Monitor  and open it  down     Step2 While holding the battery extractor tape up and out of the way  insert the battery  with the battery guide groove facing up and the battery socket towards the inside of  the Monitor     Step 3 Push the battery all the way into the compartment making sure the socket is firmly  engaged  the battery can be pushed no further      Step 4 Close the battery compartment door     Repairing the Instrument 231    Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    WARNING    232    Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement  Server Extension    Only units with serial number prefix DE020xxxxx can be repaired  For later units with  serial number prefix DE435xxxxx  only the front bezel can be replaced  and the repair  strategy for a defective device is unit exchange     It is recommended that you replace all the replaceable parts in the Extension  CO  Scrubber  and Pump  after 15 000 hours  approximately 3 years  of continuous use  See Chapter 3  Maintaining the Instrument for more details on caring for the Extension     Tools Required     A thin bladed screwdriver       A pair of large tweezers      n addition  for removing the Pump  you will need a large bladed screwdriver     There is high voltage inside the Instrument  800V   Do not connect the Measurement  Server Extension to a Monitor while the Extension housing is open     As well  parts inside the Instru
15.     amp  Safety Tests available on the Instrument including safety tests and checks for the  Instrument     Testing the Instrument 137    Test Reporting    138    Test Reporting    The following table shows what must be recorded on the Service Record after completing the  tests in this chapter     What to record    P NIBP PN P X1 X2 X3 X4 or  PN F X1 X2 X3 X4    P CO  PCO2 P X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 or  PCO2 F X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8    Safety S 1  P x1 x2 or  5 1       1   2  5 2   P x1       S 2   F x1  S 3   P x1 or  S 3        1    Where P   Pass       Fail and X x are the measured values as defined in the tests described in  this chapter       Testing the Instrument    Recommendations for Test Frequency    Recommendations for Test Frequency    The testing checklist appears in the next section of this chapter  The listed procedures should  be performed as indicated in the Suggested Testing Timetable below  The checklist may be  photocopied and should be completed by the tester  It should be filed for future reference     Functionality Assurance To verify proper operation when   e Performance Assurance Test e the monitor has been installed    e System Check e      assembly has been replaced    e System Self Test e to verify the operation any time the  unit is suspect     Preventive Maintenance Tests   e NBP Calibration Once every two    e Sidestream CO  Calibration Once a year  or following any  Instrument repairs or the replacement  of any Instrument parts  applies to  uni
16.    Inspecting the Instrument    Inspecting the Instrument    Step 1    Step 2    Step 3    Step 4    Examine the exterior of the Measurement Server  if present  the Measurement  Server Extension  and the Monitor for cleanliness and general physical condition   Ensure that plastic housings are intact  that all hardware is present and tightly fitted   and that there are no spilled liquids or other serious abuse     Inspect Server to Monitor link for cleanliness and good condition  Ensure that the  Measurement Server and or Measurement Server Extension is locked into place and  does not slide out without first releasing the locking plate on the top of the housing     Ensure all labeling is present and legible     Inspect all accessories external to the Instrument such as transducers  referring to  the manufacturer   s documentation     Verify that the backlight tube brightness is adequate  Replace the backlight tube if necessary     NOTE Philips recommends replacement of the backlight tube at the latest after 20 000 hours   approximately 3 years  of use     Inspect Cables and Cords    Step 1    Step 2    Step 3    Step 4    Step 5    122    Examine the line power plug for damage  Ensure that the prongs of the plug do not  move in the casing     Inspect the line power cord for signs of damage  If damaged  replace the entire cord   Ensure that any new line power cord or plug is fitted with the same polarity as the  old one     Inspect the interconnecting cables between the Measure
17.    ment Server  This is  only likely to occur  after a repair or  upgrade     1  Verify power source   2  Perform calibration  procedure again    3  Replace transducer  and repeat calibration  again    4  Replace the exten   sion     Check that calibration  values are within speci   fied limits by perform   ing an accuracy check   Calibrate  if required     Allow the sensor to  warm up     Place sensor on other  cal cell and start the  CAL 2 calibration  cycle     Wait for        calibra   tion to complete     Initiate the calibration  or switch off cal mode    Increase the scale of the  display channel     Perform the Firmware  update in CO   Service    Mode    select    Update  Firmware  and follow  the instructions on the  display    In certain situations  no  update 1  possible   in  these cases  continued  operation is possible  despite the INOP        Troubleshooting the Instrument    CO  NO TUBING   M3015A     CO  OCCLUSION   M3015A     CO  OVERRANGE   M3015A     CO  AUTOZERO    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    The FilterLine 15 dis   connected  or an            rect line is attached    If you Silence this  INOP  the measurement  will be switched off     1  The FilterLine or  exhaust tube 1s blocked  to the extent that a  measurement sample  cannot be taken  or   2  The outlet is  occluded at Power On    3  This INOP also  appears after the Pump  Op Time is reset     The CO  value is out     side the measurement  ran
18.    ne Config Files    Lx E  ac        E  AP  ProximAP2 1 4b5 V1 0 cFG    i  tools  E  SW            1900 8 01 02 v1 1 CFG     L  Contig  ool     FirmmwareFiles    gu       E  sw HP2524 F 02 02 v1 3 CFG      PagingT ool     WB 792064 1 2b15 v1 D CFG   E  WE WirelessM3 1 2b15 V1 0  CFG       Step 4 Copy the Viridia tools ConfigTool directory to the drive on the configuring PC  to be used for storing this program as follows     a  Open the directory to be used on the configuring PC  b  Click on  hold  and drag the Viridia tools ConfigTool directory to the open PC    directory    NOTE The Viridia tools Config Tool directory file is less than 1 4 Mb so it can be stored on a 1 4  Mb floppy disk for later use  or for transfer to a PC without a CD ROM drive     Installing the Instrument 79    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    Making the Config Files Writeable    The Config Files are read only and must be made writeable for the tool to be used for  configuration  The following steps describe the procedure after the files have been copied to  the configuring computer     Step 1 Open the ConfigFiles directory by clicking on the ConfigFiles folder in the tools  menu on the configuring PC  The files on the right of the previous figure will be  displayed     Step2 Click on the file labelled WB WirelessM3 1 2  15        to select it   NOTE The selected file must be made writeable because settings used in the configuration process  are saved to this file so they can be reused when t
19.    s objectives  you should be able to test the Monitor  the  Measurement Server and  where present  the Measurement Server Extension through the  following types of tests       Performance Assurance Checks and Tests     Accuracy  Calibration and Performance Procedures     Patient Safety Checks     This chapter provides a checklist of testing procedures for the Measurement Server  the  Measurement Server Extensions and the Monitor     For inspection procedures  preventive maintenance procedures  cleaning procedures  and  battery handling  maintenance  and good practices used to maintain the Instrument in good  working order  see  Maintaining the Instrument      Concepts    Functionality This refers to the combined Performance Assurance Test and Functionality  Assurance Testing Procedures to be found in this chapter  These tests verify correct  Instrument function in general terms     Preventive Preventive Maintenance refers specifically to the service calibration tests   Maintenance required to make sure the Instrument measurement results are accurate   When authorized Philips personnel service the Instrument  they report these  results back to Philips  The collected data forms a database to be used in  product development  These specific tests are required for the NBP  parameter and for the sidestream CO   parameter  It is not necessary   however  for hospital personnel to report results     Performance This concept refers to all the remaining accuracy and performance tests 
20.   1  on the clamp  2   as illustrated Use the visual guide  3  and the  positioning notch  4  to ensure you have the cable correctly positioned        Step 4 Squeeze open the side clips  5  and ease the cable into the clamp so that the clips  grip the gray mouldings  6         Step 5 Press the cable down firmly to ensure that it is fully seated in the clamp     NOTE Once fixed  do not remove the cable from the MSL clamp        Installing the Instrument 109    Installing the Measurement Server Mounting Options  Step 6 Select two screws and suitable fixings appropriate to surface the material  If  necessary  mark the screw positions on the surface and drill suitable holes   Step 7 Insert the 2 screws through the screw holes provided in the plate   Step 8 Tighten the screws     Step 9 Align the feet on the MMS with the locating shoes  7  on the mounting plate and  slide the MMS onto the mounting plate  The Server snap fits onto the plate        To release the Server  press and hold the latch  in the middle at the top of the mount   away from the Server and slide it out     110 Installing the Instrument    Mounting Options      the Local Recorder    Server Mounting Plate  M3080A    02     This option is used for mounting the Server on a rail or pole  The rotatable clamp gives 4  fixed positions  It is delivered ready to use and does not require installing        Step 1 Unpack the assembly and check all parts are available    Step2  Ifapplicable  fit the MSL cable clamp to the mou
21.   104   F     60 bpm in ADULT NEO  mode    120 80  90  ADULT  100 60  80  PEDI  80 50  60  NEO    EtCO  40 mmHg  ImCO  0 mmHg  AWRR 20 rpm    EtCO  40 mmHg  ImCO  0 mmHg  AWRR 20 rpm    Functionality Assurance Tests    Test Waveform    Simulated squarewave and  numeric    Simulated Resp wave and numeric    Simulated squarewave and  numerics    Numeric only  Simulated wave    Numeric only    Simulated squarewave and    numerics    Simulated squarewave and  numerics    Simulated squarewave and  numerics    a  An appropriate transducer must be plugged into the Server or Server Extension in  order to get the test reading    b  Appropriate tubing must be plugged into the Server Extension in order to get the  test reading  When in Neonatal mode the test signals are switched on  a    CO     Equip  Malf   message will appear until the test signals are switched off        action is required     Testing the Instrument    145    Preventive Maintenance Tests    NOTE    146    Preventive Maintenance Tests    Preventive Maintenance refers specifically to the series of tests required to make sure the  Instrument measurement results are accurate  When authorized Philips personnel service the  Instrument  they will report these results back to Philips  The collected data forms a database  to be used in product development  The measurements requiring these reported tests are          and sidestream CO    It is not necessary  however  for hospital personnel to report these  results     NBP Accu
22.   245  Compatibility Matrix   Release A to Release                                      245  List of Replacement and Exchange                                                   247  Momor           a a Ae a ete          248    Contents xiii    xiv    POZE                             248    Other Monor           da En em p abe eausa oes 250  Monitor Ex hanoc Parts  25 dur uem dnd epo trente bapti oae Pto eee           251             I hye quern      eet    ee are                               253  Multi Measurement Server                                                         254  M3001A Part Numbers   Front         1                                       254    M3001A MMS Part Numbers   IntelliVue Software Revision A 05 xx and Lower    256  M3001A MMS Part Numbers   IntelliVue Software Revision A 10 xx and Higher    259    M3015A Measurement Server Extension                                          266  INDO                             266  M3SU1S A Exchange        2r eoe           a Ste         268   M3016A Measurement Server Extension        amp                                    270          54 2408             270  M3016A Measurement Server Extension Exchange Parts                        271                                 Oeste an           272   Cables        MSL Through Wall Installation                                        272   MMS Measurement Server Link  MSL  Cable Clamp                                273   Wireless Assembly Exchange        amp                  
23.   A10     The Table Mount is intended for any flat  level surface  To mount the plate securely  you need  4 screws  These are not provided because the type of surface dictates the type of screw     Step 1  Step 2  Step 3    Step 4             Unpack the Table Mount and check all parts are available   Select 4 screws  appropriate to surface material    Insert the 4 screws through the screw holes provided in the plate     Tighten the screws     The Monitor snap fits onto the plate  To release the Monitor  press the button on the front of    the plate     This mount is also       available as support part M3080 63201    used for the Rollstand mount M3080A  A22    98    Installing the Instrument    Installing the Universal Bed Hanger  M3080A  A11     Installing the Universal Bed Hanger  M3080A  A11     The hanging mount is used for hanging the Monitor on the bed footboard headboard or a rail   It is delivered ready to use and does not require installing                 Step 1 Unpack the Bed Hanger and check all parts are available   Step 2 Rotate the arms to their open position   Step 3  Hang the hanger on the rail  or as appropriate      Step 4 If necessary  adjust the bed hanger to a vertical position by pulling out the slider at  the rear of the hanger     Step 5 If necessary  fix the bed hanger by hooking the rubber strap around a vertical bar  as  shown in the insert      The Monitor snap fits onto the plate  To release the Monitor  press the button on the front of  the plat
24.   AC connected  with Battery    The LEDs behave the same as described    the Checks with the Instrument Switched on  AC  Connected  without Battery  above  except that the Battery LED does the following       The Battery LED is initially on then switches first to yellow and then off for several sec   onds       Finally  the Battery LED switches to its current status color     Checks with the Instrument Switched On  AC not Connected  with Battery    The LEDs behave the same as described in Checks with the Instrument Switched on  AC  Connected  without Battery  above  except that the AC Power LED is permanently off     Troubleshooting the Instrument 167    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Troubleshooting the Front Panel LEDs    When the Monitor is first switched on  all the front panel LEDs and keys light up  momentarily  The meaning of the front panel LEDs under normal operation is given in the  following table together with a brief summary of possible defect conditions     Off Standby    AC Power    Battery    e With the Instrument on  observe the following     Green  The Monitor is  on    Off  The Monitor 1s in  standby mode     Green  The Monitor 1s  connected to the mains  power supply     Green  The battery is  fully charged   gt 95     Yellow  The battery is  charging    Red and blinking  The  battery is empty     e The backlight tube lights the LCD display      No error messages are displayed  Error messages indicate either software or hardware fault  has occurred  
25.   Exchange the Measurement Server for an  M3000A with option    06    Or   A Measurement Extension  M3015A or M3016A   is connected to a standard M3001A Measurement  Server  noninvasive measurements only  and an  M3046A Monitor with software Rev E   No  measurements  for example CO    2nd Press Temp   from the Measurement Extension are available   Exchange the Measurement Server for an M3001A  with option    06 or  C18     The M3046A Monitor does not support some of  the measurements in a measurement extension   Consider using a monitor that supports these  measurements     Either   M3001 A Measurement Server 15 connected to       M3046A Monitor with Rev  D or lower soft   ware  This conbination does not allow monitor   ing  Use only M3000A Measurement Servers  with M3046A Monitors with Rev  D or lower  software    Or   M3000A Measurement Server is connected to       M3046A Monitor with Rev  E software  This  conbination does not allow monitoring  Use only  M3001A Measurement Servers with M3046A  Monitors with Rev  E software     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Troubleshooting the Installed Instrument    Troubleshooting When There is No Message on the Screen    Symptom    Some or all of the  numerics or waves  are missing from    the screen     Monitor screen    dim    Monitor screen    blank    Troubleshooting the Instrument    No measurements  connected    No transducers  connected    Defective transducer    Measurement Server  defective    Brightness controls not  proper
26.   June 2003    Seventh Edition                                     March 2005    Responsibility of the Manufacturer    Philips Medical Systems only considers itself responsible for any effects on safety  reliability  and performance of the equipment if       assembly operations  extensions  re adjustments  modifications or repairs are carried out by  persons authorized by Philips  and          electrical installation of the relevant room complies with national standards  and     the instrument is used in accordance with the instructions for use     To ensure safety  use only those Philips parts and accessories specified for use with the  Monitor  If non Philips parts are used  Philips Medical Systems is not liable for any damage  that these parts may cause to the equipment     WARNING    CAUTION    In this Book    This Service Guide contains technical details on the Monitor  Measurement Server and  Measurement Server Extensions     The purpose of this book is to provide a technical foundation for the monitoring system in  order to support effective troubleshooting and repair  The book is not intended to be a  comprehensive  in depth explanation of the product architecture or technical implementation   Rather  it is developed to offer enough information on the functions and operations of the  monitoring systems so that engineers who repair them are better able to understand how they  work     It covers the physiological measurements that the products are designed to provide  t
27.   The procedure for replacing the Pump and CO   Scrubber is found in  Repairing the  Instrument      The effectiveness of the Pump and the CO   Scrubber gradually decreases over time  As a  result  periodic replacement is necessary     Philips recommends replacement as follows       After 15 000 hours of use  check    Pump Op Time   See    Checking and Resetting Time  Counters  on page 153         If the Instrument requires repairs  check the time counters  and replace the Pump and CO   Scrubber if necessary  in addition to any other repairs     After fitting the new part s   go to Service Mode and reset the counter for the part s  you have  replaced  The procedure for resetting the counters is found in  Repairing the Instrument      When the PumpOpTime has been reset an INOP will be generated   CO5 OCCLUSION   To  clear this INOP you must perform a flow check and store the flow in Service Mode  select     Store Flow       Replacement of the Infrared Lamp    The infrared lamp can be exchanged only in units with serial number prefix DE020xxxxx  manufactured before June 2002  The support strategy for later units in case of an infrared  lamp failure is M3015A unit exchange     General Cleaning of the Instrument    The Monitor  the Measurement Server  and the Measurement Server Extension should be  kept free of dust and dirt  In particular  exterior cleaning of the Monitor s case and LCD  screen is recommended  Clean the case with a lint free cloth or sponge  moistened with eithe
28.   These types of errors might force the Monitor to go back to user defaults  Fatal errors  usually point to a defective System Board  This will be reported to the user by the INOP  alarm  CHECK STATUS LOG  The fatal error can be reviewed in the Status Log menu   After the Status Log is reviewed  the INOP is removed     If a fatal error occurs which cannot be diagnosed  download the Status Log into a file using  the M3 Support Tool and send it to the Technical Marketing department at Philips Medical  Systems     Non Fatal Errors   These indicate general errors that are not significant enough to affect  normal Monitor operation  Non fatal errors are errors that give some hints about an  unexpected behavior of the system but that are not relevant to correct system function  They  do not cause the Instrument to reset or restart  They are not reported during monitoring but  can be seen in the Status Log if the Monitor is in Service Mode     Monitor  Measurement Server and Measurement Server Extension errors are reported  separately in the Status Log     Troubleshooting the Instrument 197    Part 3 Using Support Functions    The following table explains the contents of the Status Log  The first entry on the left side of  the Status Log corresponds to the top entry under Field Title in the table     H  C  or N          C   tThese denote fatal errors which  have caused a Hot start  like switching the  Instrument off on  or a Cold start  like per   forming a System Test    N   tThis d
29.   Use extensions only with  ments are not  M3015A or M3016A  15   M3046A M4 monitors  supported by the   connected to an M3046A   Monitor  M3 monitor    prompt message   No measurements            2nd Press Temp  from the  Measurement Extension  are available        186 Troubleshooting the Instrument     Measurement  Server Configu   ration not sup   ported  status  message       Some measure   ments in MMS  Extension are  not supported     prompt message    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Either   A Measurement Extension   M3015A      M3016A  15  connected to a standard  M3000A Measurement  Server  noninvasive meas   urements only  and an  M3046A Monitor with  software Rev D or lower   No measurements  COs     2nd Press Temp  from the  Measurement Extension  are available    Or   A Measurement Extension   M3015A or M3016A  15  connected to a standard  M3001A Measurement  Server  noninvasive meas   urements only  and an  M3046A Monitor with  software Rev E   No meas   urements        2nd Press     Temp  from the Measure   ment Extension are availa   ble     The M3046A Monitor  does not support some of  the measurements       Measurement Extension     Use extensions only with  Extended Measurement  Servers   C06 for  M3000A     06 and C18  for M3001A         187    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    188     Measurement  Server not sup   ported  status  message    Either   M3001A Measurement  Server 1s conne
30.   any batteries from the charger     Step 2 Place the device upside down and remove the five cross head screws holding the  chassis baseplate        Step 3 Lift the front edge of the chassis baseplate  then carefully pull it forwards slightly   Note that some connected cables prevent you from completely removing the  baseplate        Repairing the Instrument 239    Disassembly Procedures for the M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner    Removing the Cooling Fans    Step 1 Open the housing  see    Opening the Housing    on page 239      Step 2 Carefully manouvre the baseplate to gain internal access to the left hand cooling  fan         Left hand  Cooling Fan          Step 4 Disconnect the two pin plug  A  connecting the cooling fan cable to the printed  circuit board  Free the cable from the cable guide  B      240 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly Procedures for the M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner    Step 5 Remove the left hand cooling fan     Note  When reconnecting the two pin plug  ensure that the red wire faces the left  side of the housing        A  B  Step 6 Remove the four screws holding the right hand cooling fan and grill   Right hand    Cooling Fan       Step 7 Disconnect the two pin plug  D  connecting the cooling fan cable to the printed  circuit board  Free the cable from the cable guide  C      Heat  Sink       Repairing the Instrument 241    Reassembling the Battery Charger and Conditioner    Step 8 Remove the right hand cooling fan     Note  When
31.   should always check and clear the status log before  starting an upgrade  When the upgrade is  complete  recheck the status log and clear before  normal operation is resumed    Troubleshooting the Printer Connection    Here 15 a list of some easily corrected troubleshooting cases  If the fault is not described  below  investigate further as soon as possible  For more information  see  Testing the  Instrument  and  Repairing the Instrument      Message    You cannot find the print  softkeys  or the Print Screen  SmartKey 15 inactive     You do not get a printout     What To Do    Make sure that the printer is configured  see  Connecting a Printer in  Installing the  Instrument       If printing via an infrared link      Make sure that the printer 1s connected to the  JetEye    Make sure that the JetEye is positioned properly  at the side of the Monitor  see Installing the  Wireless Infrared Printer Connector  M3080A   HO5  in  Installing the Instrument      Make sure that both the JetEye and the printer are  switched on     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Data is missing from a print   out and the printout is at  lower resolution than normal    Your printout is too big for  the page        REMOTE PRINTER  NOT AVAILABLE mes   Sage appears on the screen     The printout does not appear  at the network printer but  there is no error message at  the Monitor     a  No longer available   b  If applicable     Troubleshooting the Recorder Connection    If printing via a network li
32.   to 5000 ppm sodium hypochlorite  1 10 dilution of household bleach  are  effective depending on the amount of organic material  e g  blood  mucus  present on the  surface to be cleaned and disinfected     Philips makes no claims regarding the efficacy of these chemicals or this method as means  for infection control  Consult your hospital s Infection Control Officer or Epidemiologist     For comprehensive details on cleaning agents and their efficacy  refer to    Guidelines for  Prevention of Transmission of Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Hepatitis B Virus to  Health Care and Public Safety Workers   issued by the U S  Department of Health and  Human Services  Public Health Service  Centers for Disease Control  Atlanta  Georgia   February 1989     Maintaining the Instrument                Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    This section provides some information on how to handle and maintain the battery in order to  get the best usage from it  Additionally  some good working practices are also given  regarding the correct disposal of the battery     About the Battery    The rechargeable battery used in the Monitor is regarded as a Smart battery because it has  built in circuitry   This circuitry communicates battery status information to the Monitor      If an unused battery does not communicate  the LEDs do not light   a MALFUNCTION  message will appear when it is inserted in a monitor  In this situation 
33.  1  Check if the measure   ment extension is sup   ported by the system  configuration  hardware  and software   Check that  no    UPDATE FW    mes   sage 1s displayed     2  Check CO  Data    Acquisition hardware  revision  If the Measure   ment Server Extension 15  incompatible with wire   less network either use  this Measurement Server  Extension on a monitor  without wireless network  or upgrade the Measure   ment Server Extension   contact your service rep   resentative      3  Check that a FilterLine  15 connected     4  Check that        meas   urement 1s switched on     5  Check whether the  pump is running     6  Replace the FilterLine  and check again     1  Check settings         0 correction     BTPS or STPD     Max Hold or standard  averaging    2  Perform accuracy check  and calibrate  if necessary        Troubleshooting the Instrument    No wave dis   played but chan     nel is present       Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Check for INOPS and fol   low recommended actions       Mainstream CO  Measurement Server Extension related problems       CHECK CAL     INOP    Accuracy prob   lems    No wave dis   played and no  channel present    Incorrect    0 setting    Incorrect humidity correc   tion setting  BTPS STPD   Incorrect Max Hold set   ting   Invalid calibration    1 Measurement Extension  is used with a monitor  and or Measurement  Server with Release A  software                   2 CO  measurement  switched off       Invalid calibratio
34.  1  P x1 x2   or   5 1       1   2    where      Pass       Fail and x1  x2 are the values defined in the two tests described above     5 2  Protective Earth Continuity           Instrument under test    Insulating pad    50 Hz    25 Aor1 5Ir     If equipotential connection present   measure also  with yellow green E P  conductor connected     Expected test results   With mains cable  maximum impedance x   100 mOhms  IEC 60601 1 and UL2601 1   Measures impedance of Protective Earth  PE  terminal to all exposed metal parts of    Instrument under Test  IUT   which are for safety reasons connected to the Protective Earth   PE   Test current 5 Amp applied for 5 to 10 seconds     Testing the Instrument 161    Patient Safety Checks    162    Reporting safety test S 2  in the Service record  S 2  P x   or   S 2  F x    where P   Pass       Fail and x 15 the value defined in the test described above    S 3  Patient Leakage current   Single Fault Condition  S F C   mains on applied  part           Not present in Class 2  Instrument under test       L  N               N  L  a    T  54     ES   Signal part    in  and or    i output                                               Expected test results   Maximum leakage current  x              250V  IEC60601 1 and UL2601 1   Measures patient leakage current from applied Part to earth caused by external main  voltage on applied Part with switch S5 open and closed  Each polarity combination    possible is tested using S2 and S6  This test is 
35.  140 Testing the Instrument    Testing Checklist    Testing Checklist    Performance Assurance Test  Accuracy and Performance Procedures  160  160  61  162    Nurse Call Relay Performance Test  ECG Sync Performance Test    S 1  Part 1  System Enclosure Leakage Current   NC    normal condition    S 1  Part 2  System Enclosure Leakage current     Single Fault  open earth    S 2  Protective Earth Continuity           S 3  Patient Leakage current   Single Fault  Condition  S F C   mains on applied part    1  Patient Safety Checks  1       Testing the Instrument 141    Serial Numbers    142    Serial Numbers    When recording test results  these are always associated with a particular instrument by  means of the serial number  The serial numbers for the Monitor and the Measurement Server  can be seen in the    Revisions    window  press Setup key then select    Revisions      However   if a Measurement Server Extension  M3015A or M3016A  is in use  the number will not  appear and must be noted down from the back of the Extension  To do this  remove the  Measurement Server and Extension from the Monitor  so that the back of the extension is  visible     Passwords    The following table show the passwords you need to enter to access the different modes  Go  to Operating Modes and use the TouchStrip to specify the password  Press OK        42351 15251 25531    Visual Test    Inspect the system for obvious signs of damage  Also check external leads and accessories   What to record on 
36.  210  Checks before opening the instrument  166    Index    Cleaning Agents  126  Cleaning agents  126  Cleaning of the System  125  clearance  66  CO    Calibration Verification  153   Flow Rate Check and Calibration  151   Noise Check  152   Pump check  151  CO  AUTOZERO   INOP description  181  CO  CAL FAILED   INOP description  180  CO  CAL MODE   INOP description  180  CO  CAL RUNNING   INOP description  180  CO  CHANGE SCALE   INOP description  180  CO  CHECK CAL   INOP description  180  CO  EQUIP MALF   INOP description  179  CO  Gas Measurement   Check  152  CO  NO TRANSDUCER   INOP description  179  CO  NO TUBING   INOP description  181  CO  OCCLUSION   INOP description  181  CO  OVERRANGE   INOP description  181  CO  PURGING   INOP description  182  CO   Scrubber   replacement  125  CO  SENSOR WARM UP   INOP description  180  CO  UPDATE FW   INOP description  180  CO  WAIT CAL 2   INOP description  180  Coldstart Test  206  combining equipment  65  Compatibility Matrix  245  Compatibility problems  186  condensation  66  configuration  87  connecting measurement server  71  connector   AC Power  5   measurement  7   measurement server  6  7  92   nurse call  6  92   Quick Link  6  7  92   software update  6  92   transducer  7  corrosive gases  66    Calibration    D    default setting  10   Defib Data In  67   defib synch  5  defibrillation protection  64  defibrillator  67   Delta  46  54    Index    Delta Temp  45  53   Delta Temp calculation feature  46  54   Di
37.  235    Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    NOTE    NOTE    236    Removing the Pump   To remove the Pump  do the following    Step 1 Locate the Pump in the Extension    Step 2 Being careful not to touch anything else in the Extension  unscrew the screw    holding the pump bracket in position  Lift the top part of the bracket away and lift  out the pump        screw holding  pump bracket    Step 3 Gently disconnect the flow tubing attached to the Extension from the Pump     Be sure to note which tube attaches to the inlet and which tube attaches to the outlet     Step 4 Gently disconnect the power lead which attaches the Pump to the Extension   Step5 Remove the Pump    After replacing the Pump  reset the value displayed on the Reset PumpOpTime selection to  zero  Service Mode gt CO  Setup   When the PumpOpTime has been reset an INOP will be    generated     CO  OCCLUSION   To clear this INOP you must perform a flow check and  store the flow in Service Mode  select    Store Flow      Repairing the Instrument    WARNING    WARNING    Refit Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    Refit Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server  Extension   Tools Required        A thin bladed screwdriver       A pair of large tweezers     In addition  for refitting the Pump  you will need    large bladed screwdriver     There is high voltage inside the Instrument  800V   Do not connect the Measurement  Server Extension to a Monitor while the 
38.  62233 453563332931 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  German    M3046 62234 453563332941 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Dutch    M3046 62235 453563332951 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Spanish    M3046 62236 453563332961 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Italian    M3046 62237 453563332971 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Norwegian    M3046 62238 453563332981 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Swedish    M3046 62239 453563332991 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Finnish    M3046 62240 453563333001 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Japanese    M3046 62241 453563333011 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Danish    M3046 62242 453563333021 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Traditional Chinese    M3046 62243 453563333031 Monitor Bezel IrDA Interface  Simplified Chinese    M3046 62244 453563333041 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Portuguese    M3046 62245 453563333051 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Greek    M3046 62247 453563333061 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Russian    M3046 62250 453563333071 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  Polish    Serial Interface for Local Recorder Connection    M3046 62331 453563484941 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  English    M3046 62332 453563484951 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  French    M3046 62333 453563484961 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  German    M3046 62334 453563484971 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Dutch    M3046 62335 453563484981 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Spanish    M3046 62336 453563484991 Monitor Bezel  Ser
39.  71034 Boeblingen  Germany                 2003 05 NRTL C      2    D    The printer port uses LED devices for infrared communication with the printer  These LED  devices are measured to be AEL Class 1 LED Products per IEC 825 1 and CENELEC  EN60825 1 Standards             0366  0560    The Philips M3046A Compact Portable Patient Monitor complies with the   D requirements of the Council Directive 93 42 EEC of 14 June 1993    Medical Device Directive  and Council Directive 1999 5 EC of 9 March   1999  Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive      Installing the Instrument    Installing the Instrument    Preparing to Install the Monitor    The following are the markings on the back of the M3001A Measurement Server and the  Measurement Server Extension     Prod No                TM       XXXXXXXXXX    Opt  XXX XXX XXXXXX                    D 71034 Boeblingen Germany    Shows date  of manufacture                       Made in    Germany  2003 05  NRTL C         0366 The M3001A Multi Measurement Server and M3015A M3016A Measurement    Server Extension comply with the requirements of the Council Directive 93 42 EEC of 14  June 1993  Medical Device Directive      69    Unpacking the Monitor    CAUTION    70    Unpacking the Monitor    The box containing your Monitor comes with the following       The Monitor      A Power Cord      The Instructions for Use and Quick Reference Guide  printed       Translation Reference for M3 M4 Monitor Texts  non Roman 8 languages on
40.  Body Temperature Pressure  Saturated  BTPS  and Standard Pressure Temperature Dry  STPD   The Extension meas   ures STPD and uses this correction formula    BTPS z 0 94 x STPD      Max Hold    There are three possible selections     Off   The ETCO  and IMCO2 numerics display the breath to breath value       10 seconds   The ETCO  and IMCO  numerics display the highest lowest value within a  moving window over a 10 second period       20 seconds    The ETCO  and IMCO  numerics display the highest lowest value within a  moving window over a 20 second period     Introduction to the Instrument    Sidestream        Measurement    Block Diagram of the Sidestream CO  measurement    Serial Controller    interface and  with Peripherals       Analog Pressure    Section Sensor       Gas Outlet  Flow System        TI            ump     solenoid          Exciter    IR Detectors  Source and  Temp Sensor  Sample Line Inlet      Optical      Code  Recog   nition    Theory of Operation for M3015A Sidestream CO     Sidestream CO  is measured based on non dispersive infrared absorption of breathing gas  samples  Signals progress through the circuit as follows     Flow System    The flow system circulates the sidestream gas sample and pumps out waste gas     Temperature Sensor  The temperature of the detector is measured and used to compensate temperature drift of the    CO  reading  Signals from the temperature sensor in the detector are amplified and then  passed through an Analog to Digital 
41.  Front Bezel  Portuguese    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Parts    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number    M3016 44174 453563483051 M3016A Front Bezel  Greek    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Exchange Parts       Product Exchange Part 12 Digit  Option 5 Reordering Description    Number    Number    M3016A  A01 M3016 6801A 453563332581 Exchange M3016A Measurement Server Extension   Pressure and Temperature with Mainstream CO     English        M3016A  A02 M3016 6831A 453563483091 Exchange M3016A Measurement Server Extension   Pressure and Temperature  without Mainstream  CO    English     a  For all languages apart from French  Danish And Chinese  order also the local language bezel as shown  under    M3016A Parts  on page 270     Replacement Parts 271    Support Related Parts    Support Related Parts    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number    M3199 60104 UTP Patch Cable  approx  2 1m   7 0ft     Wireless Board The tool for the wireless board configuration is included on the    Configuration Tool IntelliVue Information Center CD ROM    M3080 10801 VPS Recovery CD    Site Survey Tool N A Site Survey Tool is available from Connectronics   www connectronics com   The part number is 82 6332 7402   05  Range LAN2 PCMCIA Card  One piece with Snap on  antenna        Cables and MSL Through Wall Installation Parts    For further information on cabling  refer also to the IntelliVue Service Guides     12 Digit  Product Option Bare Number Reorder
42.  If the  transducer 15 replaced   the new transducer must  be calibrated     Use only M3001A  Server with a Monitor  with Rev  E software     1  Make sure the Server  15 connected to the  Monitor    2  Replace the Server  with a known good  Server    3  Check link bar and  cables    4  Replace the System  Board     1  Check cable connec   tions    2  Replace speaker    3  Replace the System  Board     Disconnect the unsup   ported device     Verify failure and  replace the Extension  with a known good  Extension     1  Connect a transducer   2  Replace a defective  transducer and recali   brate the parameter        179    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    CO  CAL FAILED   M3016A     CO  CHECK CAL   M3016A            SENSOR  WARM UP    CO  WAIT CAL 2   M3016A            CAL RUN     NING   M3016A     CO  CAL MODE   M3016A     CO  CHANGE  SCALE    CO  UPDATE FW   M3015A     Calibration aborted due  to power failure  unsta   ble signal during cali   bration or transducer  placed on the wrong  calibration cell            value is less than     4mmHg  greater than  150 mmHg     The sensor has not  reached operating tem   perature     The CAL 1 calibration  cycle is complete  the  CAL 2 calibration cycle  must be started     CO  calibration is run   ning     Cal mode 15 set but the  calibration has not been  initiated     ETCO  wave is larger    than the display chan   nel     The software in the  Measurement Extension  does not match the soft   ware in the Measure
43.  LCD Assembly and backlight tubes  complete the steps for removing the LCD  Assembly and backlight tubes in reverse     When you push the Display Assembly back into the chassis  make sure that the 6 clips around    the cushion are still in place and are not bent     Refitting the Connector Board    To refit the Connector Board  complete the steps for removing the Connector Board in  reverse     Refitting the Speaker    To refit the Speaker  complete the steps for removing the Speaker in reverse     Refitting the Power Supply    To refit the Power Supply  complete the steps for removing the Power Supply in reverse     Repairing the Instrument    Refit Procedures for the Monitor    NOTE When replacing the Power Supply  make sure it slides into the guide rails provided in the  chassis  Be sure to refit the anti vibration screws     Refitting the Wireless Assembly    To refit the wireless assembly  complete the steps for removing the wireless assembly in  reverse     Refitting the Chassis    To refit the chassis  complete the steps for removing the chassis in reverse  When  reconnecting the Antenna Cable  observe the following       Route the free end of the antenna cable through the middle hole  1  below  in the right hand  column of three holes  as viewed from the back side of the sheet metal            Connect the free end of the antenna cable to the connector on the corner of the wireless  LAN board  2  above      Refitting the Battery  To refit the battery  do the following 
44.  NBP  Measurement    32    measurement     Pressure Pump   Inflates the cuff to preset limits  once or repeatedly  depending on the  measurement method used     Pressure Sensor   Measures cuff pressure using solid state technology     Overpressure Safety System   Triggers alerts at given pressures and time limits  and  deflates the cuff     Bandpass Filter   Extracts arterial pressure oscillations from the cuff pressure     Deflation System   Automatically deflates the cuff at steps of a given magnitude     NBP Measurement Characteristic    See    Selecting NBP Measurement Characteristic    on page 87     Theory of Operation  As NBP signals pass from the patient to the Monitor  they progress through stages  corresponding to logical sections of the circuit  as shown in the block diagram  Circuit     related faults can generally be isolated to one of the stages     1 Acquisition   Signals from the patient are received by the pressure sensor through the    cuff  which is connected to the circuit by a single tube  The cuff is inflated  deflated  and    monitored by a pump  deflation system  and safety system controlled by a microproces   sor     a  Cuff Inflation   During the initial cuff inflation  the cuff is inflated by the  pressure pump to a set pressure which is determined by the patient size   Thereafter the cuff is inflated by the pressure pump to a cuff pressure above the    patient   s systolic pressure  Depending on the measurement method used  inflation    occurs once
45.  SpO    Press Temp    Czech  Rel  0 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6020B 453563485731   M3000 6820B 453563332081  ECG          SpO    Press Temp    Polish  Rel  D 0     M3000A Rel  D without Press Temp    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6031B 453563331771   M3000 6831B 453563332091  ECG          5          English  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6032B 453563485741   M3000 6832B 453563332101  ECG          SpO   French  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6033B 453563485751   M3000 6833B 453563332111  ECG          SpO   German  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6034B 453563485761   M3000 6834B 453563332121  ECG          SpO    Dutch  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6035B 453563485771   M3000 6835B 453563332131  ECG          SpO    Spanish  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6036B 453563377801   M3000 6836B 453563332141  ECG          SpO   Italian  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6037B 453563485781   M3000 6837B 453563332151  ECG          SpO    Norwegian    Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6038B 453563485791   M3000 6838B 453563332161  ECG          SpO    Swedish  Rel    D 0     264 Replacement Parts                   Multi Measurement Server Parts      Exchange Parts       Exchange Parts        Description ENE    HUM  Digit 12   Digit  Part Number Reordering Part Number Reordering  Number Number  Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6039B 453563485801   M3000 6
46.  Use standard equipment   link bar  cable  Server  or Extension    The link    cable    Switch off the monitor  and contact your  biomedical department     bar connects the Server  and  where present  the  Extension  to the Moni   tor     Update Software    An M3000A  Measurement Server with  revision A software is  connected to an M3046A  Monitor with a software  revision of B or later   This combination does  not allow monitoring     BAD SERVER  LINK   plus    Measurement  Server Revision not  supported  status  message in red     Update Software       BATTERY EMPTY   Battery 1  almost empty    1  Change battery   2  Connect to AC power  supply    BATTERY LOW The battery has less Recharge the battery     than 20 minutes  charge    left     Troubleshooting the Instrument 177    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    BATTERY MAL   FUNCT     CHARGER MAL   FUNCT     CHECK INPUT  DEVICE    MEAS SERV  UNPLUGGED    178    The status of the battery  cannot be determined   The presence of the bat   tery is recognized but  communication is not  possible  This may hap   pen if the battery has  been totally  deep  dis   charged by leaving it in  the Monitor too long     Either the battery or the  charging hardware  within the Instrument is  defective     The Monitor has   detected 5 minutes or  more of constant user  interface operation  or    the user interface 1s  faulty     No Server 15 connected  or communication 1  not  possible     1  Leave the battery in  the Monito
47.  and  Features    The Measurement Server is a highly flexible patient measurement unit  which is the base for  a variety of systems that enable easy customization to a hospital s requirements  It provides a  subset of the most important patient measurements in a convenient  single part     The Measurement Server is designed to monitor patients in most critical and acute patient  care areas of the hospital  Used at the bedside  it is most commonly mounted to a Monitor  It    can also be mounted separately on a bed or a roller stand     There are two different Measurement servers that are used with the M3046A  Compatibility  depends on the software revision of the Monitor  see page 2      M3001A Measurement Server Standard Package  The Measurement Server  M3001A  standard package includes     e Measurements of ECG  including derived EASI  Resp          and SpO    e Signal and alarm processing     Introduction to the Instrument 19    Section 2   Measurement Server Description and Features    20    M3001A Measurement Server Extended Measurements Packages  All versions of the M3001A Measurement Server offer EASI lead placement using an EASI  5 electrode cable set  The conventional 12 lead ECG capability of M3001A  C12 and  C18  only works with the IntelliVue family of monitors  You can connect a 10 electrode lead set   for example  if a patient is transferred from an IntelliVue monitor   but only the standard five    electrodes  RA  LA  RL  LL  and V  are used for monitoring  The 
48.  battery charges  automatically  The battery can be charged externally from the Monitor by using the Battery  Charger and Conditioner    8043        Battery status  level of charge  is indicated several ways       LEDs on the front panel of the Monitor     Dattery gauge      Dattery status menu       NOP messages     Maintaining the Instrument 127    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices  The AC Power LED is only on when the power cord is connected and AC power is available  to the Monitor  In this case  the battery can be either charging or fully charged     The battery LED can be green  yellow  or red depending on the following conditions     ES  IGI E  battery                     no charging     battery charging mm        not applicable not _    operation left   battery empty yellow red flash if On Off     of      no no battery      battery malfunction       2      briefly   red flash if On Off   off Standby is pressed     a  Relative state of charge   b  Battery voltage less than 11 5 V   c  Restart is attempted if V bat  gt  11 5V and battery is not registered as being empty or having a malfunction        If the remaining battery operating time is only 5 minutes  the LED flashes red at a repetition  rate of 1 5 flashes per second     When the battery is empty  the Monitor switches off automatically  including the green On   Off Standby LED on the front panel   This switch off event is memorized together with the  serial number of the battery  A restart of the 
49.  be done automatically  triggered by alarms  if the  monitor is configured appropriately  The types of data that can be captured are as follows       All physiological values         All current alarms       The last 20 seconds of wave data     Introduction to the Instrument 13    Monitor Theory of Operation    14    Printer Manager    The printer manager formats and prints the following reports on either a locally attached  printer or a remote printer connected to the Instrument via the M3 Print Server       Tabular Trend Report    The printer manager takes raw data from the trend module and  generates a formatted report  The user can specify whether to print short term or long term  trend data  and the period for which the data should be printed       Event Report    The printer manager takes raw data from the event module and generates a  formatted event report  The user can specify a manual event  an alarm event  or a print  screen report       Event List Report   The printer manager takes the raw event list data from the events  module and generates a formatted event list report     A number of drawing functions support the printer manager and provide it with graphics  capabilities  The output from the printer manager is in PCL  Printer Command Language   format  and is fed to the locally attached printer  which is connected via an infrared data link   or to a remote printer  If the link to the printer is interrupted for a certain time  the printer  manager displays a pr
50.  cae e ERES REESE REX E Ee REA 64           O                              PPPm 65  Equipotential Groundin      uuu rer ro he Rr      o re debe               e e e dou we 65  Combinins EQuipinent              apie Sq UM        edt cq ume o dud 65  Eon tcs Oodd osos barred dese s Uae ey Psst ident aea ane dee eodd 66  Explanation ot symbols  USC               exibat odo beet dee eed oe 67  Unpackins the Monitor         CR dede edes 70  Installhne the           6343244545          o oem RED AUF bade oem RR AUR epa ened 70  Connecting the Measurement Server                                              71      With the Measurement Server directly      the Monitor                          71       With the Measurement Server Separate from the Monitor                        73       With the Measurement Server Attached to an M3015A M3016A Measurement Server Ex                       dub er aatis nist su eet mrt M mL S Le 74  Attaching the Monitor toa                                                           74  Detaching the Monitor from a Mount                                            74  Attaching the Measurement Server toa                                             75  Detaching the Measurement Server from a                                              75  Positioning the Measurement Server on a Clamp Mount                             75  Connecting to the Nurse Call Relay             llle 76  Modification for Nurse Call Alarm Relays           0 0 0 0    ccc eens 76  Menticali
51.  communication    interface between the CO  frontend and the        application software module running on the  main CPU of the Measurement Server     Introduction to the Instrument    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Theory of  Operation    The application specific software for the second pressure temp and CO  runs on the main  CPU in the Measurement Server  see    Measurement Server Theory of Operation  on   page 21   The pressure temperature and the CO  frontends communicate the pre processed  physiological data via the Frontend Link Protocol to the application specific software on the  main CPU of the Measurement Server     The Temp Press features available on the Extension are identical to those available on the  Server  The Temp Press selections specific to the Extension are T2 and P2     If you press the Zero key on the Server all invasive pressure channels in use are zeroed  To set  independent zero and labels for P2  however  use the softkeys on the Monitor     If two temperatures are measured  one with the Server and one with the Extension   the  differential temperature  Delta Temp  is calculated by the Server     For more information  see the section    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp   Press  measurement    on page 37     Introduction to the Instrument 53    Functional Description of the M3016A Measurement Server Extension Hardware    Functional Description of the M3016A Measurement  Serv
52.  do not get a printout   and the green Power LED  does not light     You do not get a printout   and the green Power LED is  lit     Paper moves but Recorder  does not print        Local Recorder discon   nected  message appears on  the screen        Local Recorder  Malfunction    prompt  message       Local Recorder chaeck  cable    prompt message    216    Check cable connection is secure between the  Monitor and the Recorder     If connection is sound  but the problem persists   replace the cable     Make sure that the printer is switched on     Check that the fuses are intact and that the fuse  drawer is properly and completely inserted     Check if the Monitor power is          Check the cables between the Monitor and the  Recorder     Check if the Recorder is out of paper     Check if there are any paper scraps caught under  the print head     Paper is incorrectly loaded     The Recorder is disconnected from the Monitor   or switched off    Ensure that the Recorder cable is securely  connected to the sockets on the Monitor and on  the Recorder  and that the Recorder is switched  on     Recorder hardware fault  Replace recorder     Check cable connection 1s secure between the  Monitor and the Recorder     If connection is sound  but the problem persists   replace the cable     If there is electrical interference from external  equipment  try to isolate the cause  and if  possible repair or remove the cause of the  interference     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Tutori
53.  gas p 5        the patient   s intubation system  CO  respiratory gas measurements are an indication of the  p y 2 resp ys  patient   s overall respiratory status     Blood Gas concepts important to this section are     e Airway Respiration Rate  AwRR    The number of inspirations and expirations per  minute    e End Tidal CO   EtCO     Highest partial pressure of        measured during one expira   tion      Inspired Minimum CO   ImCO     Lowest partial pressure of        during inspiration        Instantaneous CO    The CO  measurement at any instant      Ventilation   The movement of air in and out of the lungs by inspiration and expiration     Measurements    The mainstream CO  measurement produces respiratory CO   gas readings in a real time         waveform together with numerics for End Tidal CO   EtCO gt    Airway Respiration Rate   AwRR   and Inspired Minimum Carbon Dioxide  ImCO gt       Factors affecting accurate measurement of mainstream         respiratory gas are as follows       Correct cleaning of the windows on the airway adapter and the transducer     Correct placement of the transducer on the airway adapter      Temperature of the patient s breath      Amount of water vapour in the patient s breath      Barometric pressure at the site of measurement acquisition      Other gases  most notably N5O and       in the gas mixture     The          End Tidal Carbon Dioxide  measurement for Carbon Dioxide uses a technique  based on the absorption of infrared radiat
54.  gases  extremes of temperature   humidity  and so on     Allow at least 2 inches  5cm  clearance around the Instrument for proper air circulation   For a cabinet mounted installation  allow sufficient room at the front for operation and  sufficient room at the rear for servicing with the cabinet access door open     Approximately 15 minutes after switch on  the Monitor operates within specifications at the  ambient temperatures shown in the tables given in Monitor Environmental Specifications and  Measurement Server Environmental Specifications in the Specifications chapter of the User   s  Guide     Ambient temperatures that exceed these limits could affect the accuracy of the Monitor and  cause damage to the components and circuits     Make sure that during operation  the Instrument is free of condensation  Condensation can  form when equipment is moved from one building to another  thus being exposed to moisture  and differences in temperature     Possible explosion hazard if used in the presence of flammable anaesthetics     Installing the Instrument    Installing the Instrument    Preparing to Install the Monitor    Explanation of symbols used     T          Standby for switching the Monitor on and off     Attention  consult accompanying documents     Infra red Connector for connection to a printer     On the Measurement Server   Defib Data In  that is the ECG marker  pulse sent from the defibrillator to the Monitor  The marker pulse is then  processed with the ECG sign
55.  monitor   but only the standard five electrodes  RA  LA  RL  LL  and V   are used for monitoring  The rest are automatically ignored        258 Replacement Parts    Multi Measurement Server Parts    M3001A MMS Part Numbers   IntelliVue Software Revision  A 10 xx and Higher    Language    Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number    Standard Version  5 Lead ECG  no Pressure Temp     Bus                       4535648701               453563486951    Option WEOE      ECG             _                    Replacement Parts 25    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Language Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number    us            453563487031   3007 68602   453563486961 _    Option  C12  Functionality as Standard Version with M3 M4        Conventional 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue family only      Rusan                     453563487041                  453563486971    M3001 60702 453563487041 M3001 68702 453563486971    260 Replacement Parts    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Language Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number  Option  C18  Functionality as  C06 with M3 M4   Conventional 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue family only      Italian M3001 60802 M3001 68802    Korean M3001 60802 453563487051 M3001 68802 453563486981    a  All versions of the M3001A Measurement Server offer EASI lead placement using an EASI 5 electrode  cab
56.  or repeatedly  When the cuff pressure is greater than the systolic  pressure  the artery is occluded  the pressure sensor then detects only the cuff  pressure     b  Cuff Deflation   Cuff pressure is automatically released by the deflation system  in steps until the artery is only partially occluded  At that point  measurement and  processing of arterial pressure oscillations begin and continue as the cuff pressure  is progressively released     Detection   The arterial pressure oscillations are superimposed on the cuff pressure   They are extracted from the cuff pressure by a digital bandpass filter in the microcontrol   ler     Measurement   As the cuff is deflated  the magnitude of the oscillations as a function of  cuff pressure increases until the mean arterial pressure is reached  When cuff pressure  falls below the mean arterial pressure  oscillation magnitude begins to decrease     The systolic and diastolic blood pressure values are deduced from the oscillometric sig     nal by extrapolation  Differences in the results with the standard stethoscope method can  be expected  The NBP accuracy complies with AAMI SP 10     Introduction to the Instrument    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  5                    Measurement    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO  PLETH   Measurement    Description   The Measurement Server has a pulse  arterial oxygen saturation  and plethysmogram  measurement    Measurements    The measurement produces numerics for the arterial o
57.  or when Instrument parts are replaced     Tools required       Defibrillator with ECG Sync and Marker Output   e Patient simulator     Step 1 Connect the patient simulator to the ECG connector on the Measurement server and  the defibrillator to the ECG Sync Output on the M3046A     Step2  Setthe Patient simulator to the following configuration                100 bpm       ECG sinus rhythm     Step3 Switch the defibrillator to simulation mode     Step 4 Check that the marker pulse is displayed before the T wave begins     Testing the Instrument    CAUTION    NOTE    Testing the Instrument    Patient Safety Checks    Patient Safety Checks    Warnings  Cautions  and Safety Precautions      The tests described in the following paragraphs are recommended to be performed every  two years and following any installation  major repair or upgrade procedure as a proven  means of detecting abnormalities that if undetected could prove dangerous to either the  patient or the operator         All tests can be performed using commercially available Safety Analyzer test equipment   Basic measurements may also be performed with widely available multifunction instru   ments like the HP 3469A multimeter or equivalent       The consistent use of a Safety Analyzer as a routine step in closing a repair or upgrade is  emphasized as a mandatory step if approval agency status is to be maintained  The Safety  Analyzer also proves to be an excellent troubleshooting tool to detect abnormalities of line 
58.  reconnecting the two pin plug  ensure that the red wire faces the heat  sink     Removing the Air Filters  The air filters are located on the left and right side of the device     Step 1 Open the housing  see    Opening the Housing    on page 239      Step 2 Remove the plug from the five pin connector on the circuit board  This allows  better access to the inside of the charger     Air Filter  Air Filter       Step 3 Remove the two screws holding the air filter   Step 4 Remove the air filter cover   Step 5 Remove the filter mat and clean the dust out  or exchange the filter mat if required     Step 6 Insert the mat and re fit the cover and screws     Reassembling the Battery Charger and Conditioner    Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly procedure     Following Reassembly    Once you have reassembled the Instrument  you must perform a safety and performance  check on the Instrument  Refer to  Maintaining the Instrument  and  Testing the Instrument      242 Repairing the Instrument    Tutorial for Repairing the Instrument    Tutorial for Repairing the Instrument    Question 1  What must be kept open when inserting the Monitor chassis   a  When inserting the chassis  the Monitor Bezel and the link bar must not be kept  open     b  When inserting the chassis  the LCD assembly must be open and the backlight  tubes must be exposed     c  When inserting the chassis  always open the battery compartment door to avoid  striking the door clip     Question 2  Which of the follo
59.  same time as the LEDs switch off  the speaker is tested with an audible tone      Shortly after the LEDs switch off  the display backlight switches on and the M3 M4 logo  displays     The Three LEDs on the System Board come up as follows       Green LED   When the On Off Standby switches pressed  the green LED switches on  immediately      Yellow LED   The yellow LED blinks 2 times per second after the red Error LED switches  off then slows down to blink 1 time per second when the first system boot phase finishes   after approximately 2 seconds       Red LED   The red LED switches on for about 1 second after a power on  RESET  of the  System Board then switches off     If the boot process is not successful for any reason  check for obvious problems  Part 1  Troubleshooting Checklists      What To do If the Display Remains Dark    If the three LEDs on the System Board indicate that the first boot phase has finished   green on  red off  yellow blinking once per second  but the display remains dark  check  the following       Check that the display cable is seated correctly      Check  in the Display Assembly  that the video flex layer is snapped correctly onto the con   nectors on the Display Adapter Board and check the TFT panel by pressing onto the flex  layer at the connectors     NOTE Do not try to remove the video flex layer because  if snapped on correctly  removing it can  easily damage the SMT solder joints       Check that the cables of the backlight tubes are seated 
60.  second after the red Error LED  switches off then slows to blink 1  time per second after the red Error  LED switches off when the system  boot has finished  approximately 2  seconds      Red Error LED   When on  this LED If permanently on  the Sys   indicates an error  tem Board is probably  This LED switches      for about     defective     second after the System Board has  been reset then switches off        Troubleshooting the Instrument 169    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    WARNING    170    An ECG OUT LED 1s also located on the System Board and can be viewed after removing  the Power Supply cover  The meaning of the ECG OUT LED is as follows       When permanently on  220 seconds   this LED indicates an error in the ECG_OUT section      If a single fatal error in the ECG_OUT section is detected during power on       ECG OUT  LED switches on for up to 20 seconds   The ECG OUT LED switches off if this fatal error cannot be detected again after 20 sec   onds      At power on  the ECG OUT LED switches on for about 1 second then switches off      Every time the        OUT communicates with the Server  the ECG OUT LED blinks  twice      Every time an error in the        OUT communication to the Server is detected  the ECG  OUT LED switches on for 1 2 seconds     Troubleshooting the Display Adapter Board LED    High Voltage   Voltages dangerous to life are present in the Instrument when it is  connected to the mains power supply  Do not attempt any adjustment  or make 
61.  swivel angle     Hang the bed hanger over the rail     104    Installing the Instrument    Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A  A14     Attached to the Monitor    This option is used to attach the Tilt Swivel mount directly to the rear of the Monitor  The  Monitor can then be mounted on the GCX Wall Channel or can be used together with the  Universal Pole Clamp        Step 1 Unpack the Tilt Swivel mount and check all parts are available     Step 2 Secure the tilt swivel mounting to the Monitor rear panel with the 2 screws  provided     Step    Tighten the screws     Installing the Instrument 105    Installing the GCX Wall Channel  M3080A  A15     Installing the GCX Wall Channel  M3080A    15     This option 1s the GCX Wall Channel only  To install it  follow the documentation packaged  with the channel        106 Installing the Instrument    Installing the Universal Pole Clamp  M3080A    05     Installing the Universal Pole Clamp  M3080A    05     This option is used to mount the Monitor on a pole or rail        Step 1 Unpack the clamp and check all parts are available    Step 2 Decide whether the clamp is to be secured for vertical positioning  on a pole  or for  horizontal positioning  on a rail   The rear of the Monitor is provided with 4 screw  holes to cover both positioning possibilities    Step3 Secure the clamp to the Monitor with the 2 screws provided     Step 4 Tighten the screws     Attach the clamp to the rail or pole as appropriate     Installing the Instru
62.  the Monitor   If it is not tight against the back of the Monitor  slip it away from the link bar until it  15        Step 3 Slip the Measurement Server forward until it clicks into place   To remove the Measurement Server from the Monitor  move the latch  in the middle    at the top of the Monitor  toward the front of the Monitor  and slide the  Measurement Server away from the link bar     Latch       Installing the Instrument    Connecting the Measurement Server          With the Measurement Server Separate from the Monitor    You can connect the Measurement Server to the Monitor using a server link cable  MSL  as  follows     Step 1 You can connect the cable to the plug on the link bar  or directly to the Monitor as  follows        Link Bar    To remove the link bar   a  Turn the latch guard away from the edge of the latch   b  Unlatch the link bar from the back of the Monitor     c  Slide the link bar away from the Monitor   Step 2 Attach the socket end of the cable to the Monitor     Step 3 Attach the other end of the cable to the Measurement Server or  if present  the  M3015A M3016A Measurement Server Extension        Installing the Instrument 73    Attaching the Monitor to a Mount    74       With the Measurement Server Attached to an M3015A M3016A  Measurement Server Extension    The Measurement Server can be used in conjunction with a Measurement Server  Extension  When the Measurement Server is used together with a Measurement Server  Extension  CO    a second temp
63.  the Server or the Extension    Step 1 Make sure the Measurement Server 15 connected to the Monitor  and the Monitor 15  switched on   For SpO   mainstream         Pressure  or Temperature  an appropriate  transducer must be plugged into the Measurement Server     or  for mainstream          the Measurement Server Extension     in order to get a test reading  For sidestream          appropriate tubing must be plugged into the Measurement Server Extension in  order to get a test reading      Step 2 Press the Setup button    Step 3 Move the highlight to Test Signals    Step 4 Press on the TouchStrip and observe the display  An example test looks similar to  the following illustration  the shape of the test signals depends on the selected filter    mode     As well  the table on the following page lists Self Test values     ries ALARMS SUSPND 2  19    Vent Rhythm    Test Signals active        monitoring  Press again to quit              44 Start  Stop Stop ALL Jero Trends Store Screen Admit Dschrg PP    144 Testing the Instrument    System Self Test Values    Module    ECG and ECG   Resp    ECG    Resp    Pressure   Systolic    Diastolic    SpO  Pleth   5        Pleth    Temperature     Pleth Pulse Rate    NBP    Sidestream CO     Mainstream CO      Test Numeric Limits    100 bpm in ADULT mode  125 bpm in NEO PEDI mode    15 rpm in ADULT mode  30 rpm in PEDI mode  55 rpm in NEO mode    120 mmHg ADULT  60 mmHg PEDI NEO    0 mmHg ADULT PEDI   NEO    100   Wave on display    40   C
64.  the Wireless Bedside Parameters window     Installing the Instrument                                        Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    Step 16 Create a log file of the Wireless Bedside configuration    The log file is a txt file that contains the menu dialog of the most recent configuration  Near  the end of this file is a summary of the device   s configuration settings  This file may be  viewed in Notepad or printed for later reference     There are several configuration settings for the M3 M4 monitor that are made by the  configuration tool that are not site specific but are different from factory default settings   These settings can be seen in the log file  but are not displayed to the user when the tool is  used       If you want to create a log file with the Log file name given  click Yes and    log  file containing the text of the menu dialog between the configuring PC and the  Wireless Adapter will be created and stored in the C  tools Config Tool  directory of the configuring computer   s hard drive       If you want to specify a different filename     a click Cancel and a window will open allowing the specification of a different  filename     b enter the new filename in the field provided     c click Yes to create a logfile with the new filename      If you do not want to create a log file  click No to close this window   If a filename is entered for which a configuration file already exists  that file will be  overwritten by the new file    Confi
65.  the pressure units  mmHg kPa      Change the pressure and pulse rate alarm limits  e Select the input filter   e Start zero and calibration procedures     Select the scale of the displayed wave     Select the displayed pressure label    Temperature Software Module    The Temperature module derives a temperature value from a YSI series 400 thermistor  temperature probe  The temperature label is selectable and temperature related alarm limits  can be set  An alarm message is displayed when the measured temperature is outside the set  range or outside the measurement range     42 Introduction to the Instrument    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    Block diagram of the Temperature Software Module    Pressure Waveform  p      b  gt  gt  Temp  Value             Calculation          Temperature    Alarming  gt  p gt  Temp  Alarms    Temperature   Mem   Temp  User Contrc    Signal Acquisition             Temperature software          To  amp  From Invasive Pressure  amp        This module is responsible for the A D conversion of the analog signal from the temperature  transducer  The Signal Acquisition module provides a raw temperature value to the Average  Calculation module  The module also performs various self tests and consistency checks to  ensure proper operation and reports errors and failures to the Alarming Module     Average Calculation    This component averages the raw measured temperature values over an interval of 1 second   The averag
66.  to analyse the mounting surface protects  both the patient and the hospital staff  Do not mount equipment unless the  screws are adequate and safe for the purpose     Installing the Instrument 63    Safety    WARNING    CAUTION    64    Safety    Patient Safety    To better secure patient safety  become familiar with the details of the    Monitor and  Measurement Server Specifications    chapter of the Instructions for Use     Patient Leakage Current    The patient leakage current is less than          at 230V 50Hz  The equipment has floating  inputs  Type CF  that are protected against the effects of defibrillation and electrosurgery     This symbol indicates that the Instrument is Type CF and is designed to have           special protection against electric shocks  particularly regarding allowable   leakage currents  having an F Type applied part  according to the standards  IEC 60601 1 EN60601 1 CSAC22 2 601 1 UL 2601 1   and is defibrillator proof     Preparing to Install the Monitor    To avoid contaminating or infecting personnel  the service environment or other  equipment  make sure that equipment which has been used before has been  appropriately disinfected and decontaminated     Power Source Requirements    See Electrical Specifications in the Specifications chapter of the Instructions for Use     Protecting against Electric Shock    The M3046A Monitor is classified as Class I Equipment with an internal power source  according to IEC 60601 1 EN 60601 1 CSAC22 2 60
67.  until it is     Step 3 Slip the Measurement Server forward until it clicks into place        Detaching the Measurement Server from a Mount    Step 1 Press and hold the latch  in the middle at the top of the mount  away from the  Measurement Server     Step2 Slide the Measurement Server off the mount in the direction of the measurement  connectors     Positioning the Measurement Server on a Clamp Mount    For convenience  if you have your Measurement Server on the clamp mount  you can  position it with any one of the four edges facing upwards  four positions   Reposition it by  completing the following steps     Installing the Instrument 75    Connecting to the Nurse Call Relay    WARNING    76    Step 1 Press and hold the mount latch toward the clamp screw        Rotate the Measurement Server and mount until you get it to the position you want     Step 2 Release the mount latch  and make sure it is clicked into one of the four slots on the  back of the mount     Connecting to the Nurse Call Relay    The nurse call relay is a 3 5mm  mono phone jack socket  It is completely isolated from the  rest of the circuitry  Under normal conditions  the tip and sleeve are  open   not shorted  together   When an alarm is indicated  the tip and sleeve are shorted together by a relay     Do not rely exclusively on the Nurse Call Relay for the notification of alarm conditions   The relay output cannot be checked by the Monitor  and the Monitor cannot notify the  user of any failure of the r
68.  voltage and grounding plus total current loads       For Europe and Asia Pacific according to   1    60601 1 1988     1 1991   A2 1995   EN60601 1 1990  A1 1991   A2 1995  For USA according to   UL2601 1    e Additional tests may be required according to local regulations       Normally  a Safety Analyzer is used to perform these procedures  Popular testers include  the DEMPSEY 232D  or for use in Europe  testers like the Rigel  Metron or Gerb  Follow  the instructions of the Instrument manufacturer     If the Dempsey is used for an extended length of time  it could be damaged by the high amp  current draw of the system    It is recommended that you file the results of annual tests  This may help to identify a  problem early particularly if the test results deteriorate over a period of time     Safety Test Procedures    The test procedures outlined in this appendix are to be used only for verifying safe  installation or service of the product in question  The setups used for these tests and the  acceptable ranges of values are derived from local and international standards but may not be  equivalent  These tests are not a substitute for local safety testing where it is required for an  installation or a service event  If using the Metron Safety tester use your local regulation to  perform the test  for example in Europe IEC601 1 IEC601 1 1 and in the US UL2601 1  The  Metron Report should print results with the names listed below  along with other data     159    Patient Saf
69.  window on the    Monitor     If two temperatures are measured  one with the Server and one with the Extension   the  differential temperature  Delta Temp  is calculated by the Server     For more information  see the section    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp   Press  measurement  on page 37     Introduction to the Instrument 45    Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension Hardware    Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement  Server Extension Hardware    The Extension receives information signals  such as Temp Press  and a sidestream         sample from the patient then transmits the data through the Server to the Monitor via the  Server to Monitor link bar  See the  Functional Description of the Measurement Server  Hardware  on page 22 for a description of the normal processing of measurement data     The sidestream CO   Extension is always used with a Server  To function correctly  both the  Server and the Extension must have compatible software revisions     WARNING Never use a Measurement Extension with a Measurement Server which contains  Release A software  A XX XX   Since the software required to process data from the  Extension is absent  the additional measurements will not be displayed   To view the software revision  press the Setup key and select Revisions     Pairing the Server with the Extension allows for the following       Measurement of both temperature and invasive blood pressure for the same patient      Two t
70. 0   battery usage time remaining in  the battery  The number is based on the average monitor loading during the previous minute     Time to Full   This refers to the approximate      10   time remaining to fully charge the  battery  The number is based on the average monitor loading during the previous minute     Maintaining the Instrument    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    When the Time to Full shows 0  the battery charge LED on the front panel remains lit until  battery calibration is complete     Maintaining the Instrument 133    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    Battery INOP Messages    The following battery related INOP messages are issued by the Monitor  All INOPs continue  until the Monitor is plugged into the AC power or the INOP condition is fixed     BATTERY LOW   This is a hard INOP which indicates that the remaining battery operating  time is less than approximately 20 minutes     BATTERY EMPTY    This is    hard INOP which indicates that the resting state operating  time for the Monitor is guaranteed for a further 5 min only  this information is derived from  the voltage of the battery   The battery LED blinks at a rate of 1 5 red flashes per second  A  severe INOP switches the main alarms suspended status back to on  and generates an INOP  alarm  If this alarm is silenced  it recurs after 3 minutes     The previous two INOPs are cleared if AC power is connected  while the following INOP  stays no matter whether AC power is c
71. 1 1 UL 2601 1  which means that it is  an instrument included in the protective grounding  protective earth  system of the room by  way of grounding contacts in the power plug     To protect the patient and hospital personnel  when operating from an AC source  the cabinet  of the Monitor must be grounded  The Monitor is equipped with a detachable 3 wire cable    which grounds the Instrument to the power line ground  protective earth  when plugged into  an appropriate 3 wire receptacle     The Monitor uses DOUBLE POLE NEUTRAL FUSING     Installing the Instrument    WARNING    WARNING    WARNING    Preparing to Install the Monitor    Disconnect the Monitor from the AC source by unplugging the power cable from the  AC source receptacle or from the AC power connector at the side of the Monitor  The  On Off Standby button does not disconnect the Monitor from the AC mains supply     Do not operate the M3046A Monitor on a 2 wire AC supply    Connect the grounding wire to the equipotential grounding post on the Monitor     RT             Equipotential  Grounding Post    Equipotential Grounding    To eliminate potential differences between different pieces of equipment  in the  medically used room  for internal examinations on the heart or the brain  the Monitor  must have a separate connection to the equipotential grounding system     One end of the equipotential grounding cable  potential equalization conductor  is connected  to the equipotential grounding post on the side of the In
72. 3 Using Support Functions    Table 3  Error Codes for Release C    Device Error  ID Code          EN  EN    Severity Information Required Action    Dum  ow           e  e oe eco               zm                              Seco    Table 4  Error Codes for Release D    as    a             Device Error    ID Code Information Required Action    Severity    M3046A Monitor    17312 20064 Software Condition  17315 20016 Software Condition    16400   Ol Software Condition  17207 20009 Software Condition    Condition    H 16400        _ Condition   see FCO 86200134 and FCO 86200185     LX 16400   502   Software Condition  see FCO 86200185    Software Condition  see FCO 86200185    Condition  see FCO 86200185        Troubleshooting the Instrument 203    Testing Wireless Network Connectivity    Testing Wireless Network Connectivity  Using the Site Survey Tool  you can check the antenna functionality     Antenna Check    This test gives a Received Signal Strength Indication  RSSI  and will indicate if the antenna  is in order     Setup   1 The M3046A should be approximately 15 feet away from the test PC    2 Configure the Wireless LAN assembly of the M3 M4 and the Site Survey  amp  Configura   tion Tool for the same Domain and Security ID  Configure using the Wireless Configura   tion Tool available on the Philips Information Center CD ROM    3 Check that the RangeLANG2 Site Survey and Configuration tool is running  if not  double    click on the RangeLAN2 Configuration Icon to start i
73. 3000 6002A    M3000 6003A    M3000 6004A    M3000 6005A    M3000 6006A    M3000 6007A    M3000 6008A    M3000 6009A    N A    M3000 6011A    M3000 6012A    M3000 6013A    M3000 6014A    N A    N A    N A    453563331761    453563485471    453563485481    453563485491    453563485501    453563485511    453563485521    453563485531    453563485541    N A    453563485551    453563485561    453563485571    453563485581    N A    N A    N A    M3000 6801A    M3000 6802A    M3000 6803A    M3000 6804A    M3000 6805A    M3000 6806A    M3000 6807A    M3000 6808A    M3000 6809A    M3000 6810A    M3000 6811A    M3000 6812A    M3000 6813A    M3000 6814A    M3000 6815A    M3000 6817A    M3000 6820A    453563331781    453563331801    453563331821    453563331841    453563331861    453563331881    453563331901    453563331921    453563331941    453563331961    453563331981    453563332001    453563332021    453563332041    N A    N A    N A    Replacement Parts    Description       Multi Measurement Server Parts    Exchange Parts    12 Digit 12 Digit    Part Number    Reordering  Number    Reordering  Number             M3000A Rel  D with Press Temp    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp     English  Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   French  Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   German  Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   Dutch  Rel     0    Exchange 
74. 3015A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation    Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension Hardware    Sidestream CO2 Measurement    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation    Functional Description of the M3016A Measurement Server Extension Hardware      Mainstream CO2 Measurement    Concepts    The following section contains information that you need to understand in order to  competently maintain and repair an M2  M3 or MA Monitor and Measurement Server with or  without a Measurement Server Extension     Theory of The theory of operation for a component describes the processing of signals  Operation within the component     Introduction to the Instrument 1    Introducing the Instrument Components    Functional The functional description of a component uses a diagram of the circuitry  Description followed by short  written explanations of the component circuitry     Introducing the Instrument Components    The M3046A Compact Portable Patient Monitor together with the Multi Measurement  Server  M3000A or M3001A  and the M3015A and M3016A Measurement Server  Extensions forms a flexible  portable  battery or line powered patient monitor  The combined  devices are referred to as the Instrument in this manual     The M3000A Multi Measurement Server can be used with M3046A patient monitors up to  and including Release D  but is incompatible with Release E monitors  All equipment from  Release C and D  M3046A monitors and the Releas
75. 34 Wire    7 2      E ET   D Video  Flat Cable     v    yp 4 40 Wire  E m E cs NNNM     7  Flat Cable  La DOSE i Display Assembly         Keyboard    LEDs    Standby On Off  PIC  On Off  5V  X Bell HIF    4 hardkeys HIF  AC Power PIC  red alarm HIF   Battery PIC  yellow alarm HIF     Display Adapter             Board 31 Pin LCD                                                 Flex Display      Y n         TouchStrips       Inverter Board Backlight    cable    IrDA           Infrared       or Serial    Interface                 ud mc                                                   eet           16 Introduction to the Instrument    Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware    The main functional areas are summarized in the following         System Board   Comprising a 68360 Controller  the Memory System  the Video System   LAN  network  connector link to Server  ECG Out  Human Interface and DC DC  Converter       Connector Board   Connecting the System Board to the AC Power Supply and battery   The LAN  network  filter and connector  the VGA connector and the Alarm Relay Output   Nurse Call  are located on the Connector Board  The Connector Board has a 48 pin  connector to the System Board     Display Assembly   Comprising a 6 5 inch TFT color LCD display  including 2 backlight  tubes   the Display Adapter Board and the associated backlight inverter board  generates  the high voltage for the tubes   These parts are packed into a soft  rubber based holder   sometimes refer
76. 453563332291   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   English  also for French  Danish  Traditional Chinese and  Simplified Chinese    M3015 44133 453563332301   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   German   M3015 44134 453563332311   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Dutch   M3015 44135 453563332321   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Spanish   M3015 44136 453563332331   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Italian   M3015 44137 453563332341   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Norwegian   M3015 44138 453563332351   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Swedish   M3015 44139 453563332361   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Finnish   M3015 44140 453563332371   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Japanese   M3015 44144 453563332381   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Portuguese   M3015 44145 453563332391   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Greek   M3015 44147 453563332401   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Russian   M3015 44149 453563471561   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Czech   M3015 44150 453563332411   M3015A Front Bezel with Pressure and Temperature   Polish   M3015 44161 453563402591   M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  English  also for French  Danish   Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese    M3015 44163 453563402601   M3015A Front Bezel wit
77. 5A       Replacement Parts 267    M3015A Measurement Server Extension Parts    M3015A Exchange Parts    Description 12 Digit 12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Part Number Reordering  Number Number    Hardware Revision A with Serial Number Prefix DE020xxxxx    M3015A unit  old hardware  with   M3015 6001A 453563332421 M3015 6801A 453563332431   Eoo     M3015A unit  old hardware  M3015 6031A 453563477861 M3015 6831A 453563477871  without Pressure and    Hardware Revision B with Serial Number Prefix DE435xxxxx    M3015A unit  new hardware  M3015 6002A 451261005321 M3015 6802A 451261005311   eco i NN NE EN  M3015A unit  new hardware  M3015 6032A 451261005341 M3015 6832A 451261005331  without Pressure and    a  For all languages apart from English  French  Danish And Chinese  order also the local language bezel as  shown under    M3015A Parts  on page 266  Both hardware revisions A and B use the same bezels              268 Replacement Parts    M3015A Measurement Server Extension Parts    M3015A Showing Front Bezel with Press Temp  and Mounting Pin       Replacement Parts 269    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Parts    Part Number    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Parts    The M3016A Measurement Server Extension does not contain any servicable parts and can  only be replaced in its entirety     M3016A Measurement Server Extensions are shipped with English front bezels only  If you  require a bezel in another language  compare the part numbers of your language to the  Engli
78. 839B 453563332171                  SpOs5  Finnish  Rel   D 0   Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6040B 453563485811   M3000 6840B 453563332181                  5       Japanese  Rel   D 0   Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6041B 453563485821   M3000 6841B 453563332191                  SpO    Danish  Rel   D 0   Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6042B 453563485831   M3000 6842B 453563332201          NBP  SpO   Traditional  Chinese  Rel  D O     Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6043B 453563485841   M3000 6843B 453563332211  ECG          SpO   Simplified   Chinese  Rel     0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6044B 453563485851   M3000 6844B 453563332221  ECG          SpO    Portuguese    Rel     0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6045B 453563485861   M3000 6845B 453563332231  ECG          SpO    Greek  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6047B 453563377811   M3000 6847B 453563332241  ECG          SpO   Russian  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6049B 453563485871                   SpO    Czech  Rel    D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6050B 453563485881   M3000 6850B 453563332251                  SpOs5  Polish  Rel    D 0        Replacement Parts 265     lt   OJ  e            gt    lt       fo  2  c  m    D      D  2  et  NY      S   lt    D     m  X  ct   D             5       S     ct  7    M3015A Measurement Server Extension Parts    M3015A Parts    12 Digit  Part Number    Reordering  Number    Description       M3015 44131 
79. 995 2005 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V          Rights Reserved  Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the prior written  consent of the copyright holder     Philips Electronics North America Corporation reserves the right to make changes in  specifications or to discontinue any product at any time without notice or obligation and will  not be liable for any consequences resulting from the use of this publication     Microsoft  Windows NT and Windows 2000 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  USA and other countries     Printing History    New editions of this document will incorporate all material updated since the previous  edition  Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement and  additional pages to be merged by a revision date at the bottom of the page  Note that pages  which are rearranged due to changes on a previous page are not considered revised     The documentation printing date and part number indicate its current edition  The printing  date changes when a new edition is printed   Minor corrections and updates which are  incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change   The document part number changes  when extensive technical changes are incorporated     First EGITUOT        July 1997  Second Edition      February 1999  Third ELO                                     June 2000  Fourth Edition                                       April 2001         EdIGOR        February 2002  Sixth               
80. ARES Rae eR eee 4   A Quick Description ot the Monitor vane e e a UE RES a ode Sp an ed s D  LFronpPaueb Ie Sois oeste dieu dva d e co bu                5  Fron OF          ote           irt Me b duke E A E        5                                           e e E 6   A Quick Description of the Measurement                                                7  Overview ot the Measurement  Server                                                   eec dade aware 7  Measurement Connectors for the M3000A    06  M3001A  C06  and  C18 Measurement Servers sudeste                          7  Measurement Connectors for the Standard M3000A and M3001A Measurement Server 7  A Quick Description of the Measurement Server             1                               9  Overview of the Measurement Server Extensions M3015A  amp  M3016A               9  Measurement Connectors for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension            9  Measurement Connectors for the M3016A Measurement Server Extension           10  A Quick Description of the Main                                                     10  Theories of Operation and Functional Descriptions                                 11  Section 1   Monitor                                                                     11  Monitor Theory of Operation                    RE Eee ELE       12  Display and User Interface Software                                             13  Alarm Manager Software Module                                           13  Admi
81. CCONCGDIS                        219            Contents    Warnings  Cautions and Safety Precautions                                      220    General Reassembly Refitting                                                      220  Disassembly Tor the                         221  Reme vins the Battery  229 s ceno ee       rk ELM      a anis 221  Removing the Power SUDDIY sese          CER IESUS RENE CS IS S        22   Removing the Chassis   dde m c boc  o cerra e ecd o MD er qe oos 222  Removing the System Board d uu                    224  Removing the Wireless Assembly  for Monitors with Wireless LAN Interface only  226  Removing the LCD Assembly and Backlight Tubes                            226  Removing the Connector Board        hee bts            bee bes sete es 228  Remove the Speaker      229  Refit Procedures for the                                                           230  Renting the System BoI d a uae aci UR Eolo de bold hae ead i ea    230  Refitting the LCD Assembly and Backlight Tubes                             230  Refitting      Connector Board                                             230             the Speaker s s di         Pd olg           Rams            EAR 230           the Power Supply        AC VER          cad de E quee      230  Refitting the Wireless Assembly            0 0    ccc cece nee teenies 231             the Cassis    231  Renting the Batlety       coco Doo vb devant    231  Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Se
82. CPU also detects INOP and error information and  handles communication with the system CPU     Introduction to the Instrument 35    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO  PLETH  Measurement    36    SpO  Algorithm Software on the System CPU  p gt  Pleth  Wave          i o       E m   pO   Value  CPU             m   o Pulse Rate  Nal  N SpO  m   pO   Alarms   SpO   Alarming   CoN       pO   Controls       The SpO  Algorithm receives the demodulated and filtered red and infrared signals  and the  transducer coding information from the SpO  measurement frontend  The red and infra red  wave is transformed into the frequency domain  An adaptive signal analysis of the frequency  information eliminates artifact and noise from the patient signal that is then used to calculate  the SpO   and Pulse numeric values     The SpO  algorithm also detects non pulsatile or noisy signals  and generates the appropriate  INOPs     The wave is communicated to the Monitor  via the operating system   the SpO  and pulse  rate are communicated to the average calculation software  and INOPs are communicated to  the alarming software         The Average Calculation software receives the SpO   value for each beat from the 5       algorithm  and calculates the average over the time interval configured by the user  This  value is communicated to the Monitor via the operating system  and to the Alarming  software     The SpO  Alarming software gets the average SpO  value from the average calculation  so
83. D remain off  check if the Monitor  Bezel and display cables are connected properly to the System Board      Check the display cable is seated correctly  particularly if it is offset by one row too low in  this case the  5V is shorted to ground and the Instrument remains off       If the AC power LED still remains off  check the AC power supply   If necessary  replace  the fuses on the Power Supply board or replace the complete Power Supply       If the AC power LED still remains off and or the Monitor still cannot be switched on  the  Monitor Bezel might be defective  Try a known good Monitor Bezel      If the AC Power LED still remains off and or the Monitor still cannot be switched on   replace the System Board     What To Do if the Monitor Cannot Be Switched On  Battery powered      Connect AC power to the Monitor and make sure it can be switched on and operates prop    erly    Make sure that the battery is adequately charged  press charge indicator on battery  at least   one green LED should switch on     Insert the battery into the Monitor  AC power still connected   the Battery LED should   switch on  green  yellow  or red     If the Battery LED remains off or is red  replace the battery with a known good one    If the Battery LED still remains off  either the LED is defective or the battery control circuit   on the System Board 15 defective    To check whether the Battery LED is defective  disconnect AC power and switch on the   Monitor  If the Monitor works  most lik
84. Extension housing is open     As well  parts inside the Instrument may be contaminated with bacteria  Protect  yourself from possible infection by wearing examination gloves during these  procedures     Refitting the CO  Scrubber    The CO  Scrubber contains lithium hydroxide monohydrate  This is a strong base  Do  not open or damage the CO  Scrubber  If you come into contact with the CO  Scrubber  material  flush the area immediately with water and consult a doctor     To refit the        Scrubber  do the following     Step 1 Feed the end of the CO  Scrubber through the bracket to meet the Extension intake  tube     Step 2 Push the intake tube firmly into the scrubber end to connect it     Step 3 Holding the body of the CO  Scrubber with tweezers  feed the CO  Scrubber fresh  air intake under the second bracket and position it     Repairing the Instrument 237    Refit Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    NOTE    NOTE    NOTE    238    Refitting the Pump   To refit the Pump  do the following    Step 1 Gently connect the power lead to the Extension    The power lead can only be connected one way  Do not try to force the power lead into   position  Instead  align it correctly and connect it gently    Step 2 Connect the flow tubing to the Pump    Be sure to reconnect the inlet tube to the inlet valve and the outlet tube to the outlet valve    Step 3 Being careful not to touch anything else in the Extension  insert the pump into the  bracket on the PC board  
85. If error messages are displayed  refer to error codes later in this chapter      The brightness of the LCD display is adequate  If not  adjust it accordingly      The green LED on the System Board is on  see the following section      168    Normal Operation Defect Condition    The LED remains off  Suspect   1  Monitor Bezel cable connec   tion    2  System Board   Go to the troubleshooting sec   tion     The LED remains off  Suspect   1  Power Supply    2  Monitor Bezel cable connec   tion    3  System Board    Go to the troubleshooting sec   tion     Same as for AC Power condi   tion        Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Troubleshooting the System Board LEDs    Switch the Monitor off then on again to observe the System Board LEDs  These can be  viewed through the top left corner of the rear panel   You need to remove the Server to view  these LEDs         View  x3   System Board            View  x1   System Board  LED  ECG OUT     Remove  Power Supply  Cover    The meaning of the System Board LEDs is given in the following table together with a brief  summary of possible defect conditions     Green    5V power LED  When on  indi  Off  Check Power Supply  cates the presence of  5V  and associated cabling     Yel  Main CPU status LED   When        If permanently on or off   low and blinking  this LED indicates indicates a hung CPU   normal CPU operation    Reload software  This LED starts to blink 2 times per     Exchange system board  
86. LED    Green   Battery full   gt 95        AC Power LED Yellow  Battery charging    Green when AC Power    Blinking Red    is Connected                   Front of Monitor                   Menu Highlight  Up Key   gt  p                      Out             Marker In   lt 12V   Key   7  Equipotential  qe Grounding Post  Menu      AC Power  Highlight                            Down Key a      ER      Battery  Compartment    TouchStrips       Infrared Printer Port  or   Serial connector for  local recorder   depending on option     Introduction to the Instrument 5    A Quick Description of the Monitor    Back of Monitor               Connector to  the Measurement    Server   lt 48V  Catches for    attaching the  Measurement  Server    LAN Software Update  Connector   lt 5       Connector for an additional  display  VGA Interface    lt 3 3V     Mounting Plate  Protective earth    connector point  for additional display    6 Introduction to the Instrument    A Quick Description of the Measurement Server    A Quick Description of the Measurement Server    Overview of the Measurement Server       Measurement Connectors for the M3000A  C06  M3001A  C06  and C18 Measurement Servers    Note   Press and Temp cannot  be used at the same ti me        Measurement Connectors for the Standard M3000A and M3001A  Measurement Server       Introduction to the Instrument 7    A Quick Description of the Measurement Server    M3001A Connectors and Keys    White ECG Resp connector  NBP Start Stop ke
87. Make sure that the pump is horizontal and does not touch  the PC board   Vibration from the pump in operation will damage the Extension if  the pump touches the PC board     Step 4 Replace the top part of the bracket and screw firmly into position    After replacing the Pump  reset the value displayed on the Reset PumpOpTime selection to   zero  Service Mode gt CO  Setup   When the PumpOpTime has been reset an INOP will be    generated     CO OCCLUSION   To clear this INOP you must perform a flow check and  store the flow in Service Mode  select    Store Flow       Refitting the Extension Bottom Cover  To refit the Extension bottom cover  do the following     Step 1  Latch the link bar end into place then press click the bottom cover back into place  covering the interior of the Extension     Step 2 Holding the bottom cover firmly in place  thread the two long mounting pins back  into the Extension making sure to thread them all the way to the end        2                               ded d dep d  SS SS S    NN NN NN NN NN NN UN UN                  2 Long Mounting Pins    Refitting the Front Cover    To refit the front cover  press click it back into place over the measurement connector  hardware     Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly Procedures for the M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner    Disassembly Procedures for the M8043A Battery  Charger and Conditioner    Opening the Housing    Step 1 Disconnect the Battery Charger and Conditioner from AC mains power  Remove
88. Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   Spanish  Rel     0    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   Italian  Rel  D O    Exchange Measurement Server                   SpO    Press Temp   Norwegian  Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server                   SpO    Press Temp   Swedish  Rel  0 0    Exchange Measurement Server                   SpO    Press Temp   Finnish  Rel  D O    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO   Press Temp   Japanese  Rel  0 0    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          5       Press Temp   Danish  Rel  D O    Exchange Measurement Server   ECG          SpO    Press Temp   Traditional Chinese  Rel  0 0     Exchange Measurement Server                   SpO    Press Temp           Simplified Chinese  Rel  0 0     Replacement Parts    M3000 6013B M3000 6813B    26    W    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Description 12 Digit  Part Number Reordering  Number    Exchange Parts    12 Digit  Part Number    Reordering  Number    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6014B 453563485701   M3000 6814B 453563332051  ECG          SpO   Press Temp   Portuguese  Rel  D 0        Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6015B 453563485711   M3000 6815B 453563332061  ECG          SpO    Press Temp    Greek  Rel     0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 6017B 453563377791   M3000 6817B 453563332071  ECG          SpO    Press Temp    Russian  Rel  D 0    Exchange Measurement Server  M3000 601 9B 453563485721 N A N A  ECG         
89. Measurement Server and  if present  the Measurement Server Extension inserted  correctly     Checks Before Opening the Instrument    You can isolate many problems by observing indicators on the Instrument before it is  necessary to open the Instrument     Checks with the Instrument switched Off      AC connected  without battery     AC Power LED is on  green      AC connected  with battery     AC Power LED is on  green      Battery LED is on  green if fully loaded  yellow if being charged      Battery LED red and blinking signals battery malfunction     No AC connected  with battery     All LEDs are off     It takes several seconds for the AC Power LED to switch on   off after the mains power cord  has been connected   disconnected     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Checks with the Instrument Switched On  AC connected  without Battery    AC Power LED is on  green      After pressing the On Off Standby switch  the following sequence occurs      The On Off LED switches on immediately       The Alarm LED and the Suspend LED both switch on  red  and the Battery LED switches  on  yellow        After 1 second  the Alarm LED switches to yellow then  after 1 second more  all three  LEDs  Alarm  Suspend  amp  Battery  switch off       As the LEDs switch off  the speaker test occurs with an audible tone       Shortly after the LEDs switch off  the display backlight switches on and the M3 logo dis   plays     Checks with the Instrument Switched On
90. Measurements and Monitoring       f        John C      12      ww      ua n v    o  ng dn    1        SERVICE GUIDE    EE M3 M4 Monitors   M3046A     Measurement Server    M3001A and M3000A   Measurement Server Extensions   M3015A and M3016A     PATIENT MONITORING    PHILIPS    Printed in Germany 03 05  Sixth Edition    Part Number M3046 9300F  4512 610 07711    PHILIPS    M3046A M2 M3 M4 Monitors  M3000A M3001A Measurement  Servers   M3015A M3016A Extensions to the  Measurement Servers    Service Guide    M3046 9300F  Reordering Number  4512 610 07711  Printed in Germany  March 2005  Seventh Edition    Notice    This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright  All Rights  Reserved  Reproduction  adaptation  or translation without prior written permission 1s  prohibited  except as allowed under the copyright laws     Philips Medizin Systeme B  blingen GmbH  Cardiac and Monitoring Systems  Hewlett Packard Str  2   71034 B  blingen   Germany    Printed in Germany    Warranty  The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice     Philips Medical Systems makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material   including  but not limited to  the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a  particular purpose     Philips Medical Systems shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or  consequential damages in connection with the furnishing  performance  or use of this  material        1
91. Monitor with this battery is inhibited to prevent  deep discharge  Attempts to restart the Monitor  by pressing the On Off Standby  causes the  red LED to emit a single flash   The flash may have a delay of up to 2 5 sec after pressing the  On Off Standby key   Exchanging the battery causes one of the following to happen       If the new battery is partly or fully loaded  the Monitor starts operating       If the new battery is empty       If the battery voltage  no load  is below 11 5V  a single red flash is emitted  assuming that  there is still enough power to emit this single flash        If the battery voltage is higher than 11 5V  no load  the Monitor tries to restart  If the bat   tery voltage falls below 10 5 V during charging  the Monitor registers the batttery as  empty  and the Monitor switches off automatically  Any attempt to restart the Monitor  by  pressing the On Off Standby  causes the red LED to emit a single flash  No more restarts  can be attempted with this battery     128 Maintaining the Instrument    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    Charging the Battery    Battery charging should be done in stable temperature conditions within the range 0    35  C  in order to ensure correct and full loading of the battery     Battery status is displayed by the battery gauge in the bottom right corner of the resting  display  The inner white bar shows the charge status of the battery  The longer the bar  the  more charge there is in the battery     NO
92. NBP  Measurement    NBP Modes  The measurement offers adult  pediatric  and neonatal modes     The following table lists the cuff inflation limits for each mode     Subsequent Inflations     Mode First Inflation Above Syst  lic Pressure Stat Mode  Adult 165 25 15  Pediatric 130 20 15  Neonatal 100 15 15    The following table lists the measurement ranges for each mode     Mode Systolic Diastolic Mean  Adult 30   270 10   245 20   255  Pediatric 30   180 10   150 20   160  Neonatal 30   130 10   100 20   120  Safety    The following table lists the maximum limits that ensure patient safety     Mode Maximum Maximum Time  Over pressure  Measurement Time Pressure Maximum   Adult 180 seconds 180 seconds for 300 mmHg for  gt  2  pressure  gt  15 seconds  mmHg   Pediatric 180 seconds 180 seconds for 300 mmHg for  gt  2  pressure  gt  15 seconds  mmHg   Neonatal 90 seconds 90 seconds for pres  150 mmHg for  gt  2  sure  gt  5 mmHg seconds    If any one of these safety limits is violated  an INOP is generated and the valve opens     30 Introduction to the Instrument    Non invasive Blood Pressure  NBP  Measurement    Block Diagram for NBP       x       gt    i   c  o  o       gt                                                       PRESSURE  PUMP  PRESSURE  SENSOR  PRESSURE  SENSOR  DEFLATION  SYSTEM    LL   LL      O    Components    The following components carry out the major signal processing functions within the    Introduction to the Instrument 31    Non invasive Blood Pressure 
93. Power supply defective     System board is defective     Poor connection to dis   play     Display backlight tubes  worn     Display defective     Display cable may be  incorrectly seated  The  display cable has two  rows of connectors  It is  possible  although  extremely unlikely  that  the connector has been fit   ted one row too high     Connect to AC power sup   ply or fit charged battery  and switch on the Moni   tor     Check and replace defec   tive fuse  the Power Sup   ply contains two fuses      Check if the AC power  lamp on the front panel is  on or off     Check System Board  LEDs  see Troubleshoot   ing the System Board  LEDs      Check the ribbon cable  connection from the Sys   tem Board to the Monitor    Bezel    Replace backlight tubes     Replace display     Refit the display cable  making sure that the two  rows of connectors fit  together correctly   It is  mechanically not possible  for a left right misalign   ment        Troubleshooting the Instrument    No response  when touching  or pressing the  TouchStrip  or  panel keys      All patient data  is lost or cor   rupted  indi   cated in the  error log      Printing is not  possible     No sound from  Monitor     No marker pulse  on screen     Out of sync  ECG Analog  Output    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Poor connection between  the TouchStrip and the  System Board     Defective System Board     Defective System Board     Data is stored on the 
94. Recording   gt  68  C   and allow it to cool down   Printhead Tem  for a few minutes  then try  perature     sta  again  If the problem per   tus message sists  replace the Recorder     The printhead is too The ambient temperature  cold  lt  0       in the room where the   For instance  the Recorder is used should  Recorder may have been   be above 0  C  Allow the  tranferred from storage  Recorder to warm up for a  where the temperature few minutes  then try  was below 0       again   If the problem persists   replace the Recorder        Local Recorder   The Recorder 15 discon  e Ensure the Recorder  disconnected  nected from the Monitor cable is securely    status message   or switched off connected to the sockets  on the Monitor and on the    Recorder     Ensure that the Recorder  1  switched on      Local Recorder   The Recorder is connected   connected  and available     No local alarm   Local alarm recording has   Ensure that the Recorder  recording avail    been selected  but the is switched on and con     able  status Recorder is not available    nected to the Monitor   message       196 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 3 Using Support Functions    Part 3 Using Support Functions    There are various support functions available in the monitor to assist in fault diagnosis  These  are described below  If diagnostic and error information is to be communicated to Philips   this should always associated with a particular instrument by means of the serial number  The  
95. Results    Test Expected Test Results What to record on service  record    Barometric Pres  X    difference between the reference pressure and the       2      1   2   3   4   5   6   sure Check measured ambient pressure displayed on the M3046A X7 x8   X1  12 mmHg  or    PCO2 F X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 x6   Leakage Check X2   Value of part 1 leakage check on Flowmeter XT X8    parts 1 and 2  X2 lt  4 0 ml min  P   passed  F   failed  X3   Value of part 2 leakage check on Flowmeter   X3 lt  4 0 ml min  X1  xx  two digits     Me RX    Pump Check X4   difference in pressure between cell pressure and x             ambient pressure displayed      the M3046A during occlu     sion  X4  gt 120 mmHg  XXX           Flow Check X5   difference between measured value and 50 0 ml min   X6  x x   X5 lt 7 5 ml min                 X8         Noise Check X6   Noise Index displayed on M3046A  X6 lt 3 0     CO  Gas Calibra  X7   difference between measured CO  value and calcu   tion Check lated value  based on 5         cal  gas     7  lt  2 6 mmHg     CO  Cal Verifica  XS   difference between measured CO  value and calcu   tion lated value  based on 10        cal  gas    X8  lt     0 07 x value calculated          154 Testing the Instrument    Accuracy and Performance Procedures    Accuracy and Performance Procedures    The following accuracy  calibration  and performance procedures are designed to be  completed to verify the accuracy and performance of the Instrument  They must be  performed once every 
96. TE The battery gauge shows the charge status of the available capacity remaining in the battery   It does not indicate the condition of the battery  For example  for an older battery with an  available capacity of only half of its original  theoretical capacity  the battery gauge will  indicate a  full  charge status after a charge cycle  Whenever you need to rely on accurate  indication of battery operating time  access the Battery Status Window and check the  TimeToEmpty field  see    Accessing the Battery Status Window    on page 132      Low level  of charge              If the battery 15 empty  the inner bar 15 gray     High level  of charge       If the Monitor cannot access the battery  because of a battery or hardware malfunction  the  text string Mal function is displayed on a black background inside the battery gauge and     severe INOP alarm is issued     Malfunction    Battery conditioning is necessary when the text string Condit  Battery 1  displayed        ery       In this case  we recommend you remove the battery from the monitor and replace it with a  different battery  Condition the battery you removed  The gray bar indicates how much  operating capacity remains in the battery  even if it requires conditioning     You can also charge the battery using an external Battery Charger and Conditioner     M8043A   Refer to the documentation that accompanies the charger for details on charger  use     Maintaining the Instrument 129    Battery Handling  Maintenance a
97. Wireless Assembly with US country code for        countries   Argentina  Brazil  Canada  Chile  China  Columbia  Dominican Republic   Hong Kong  Malaysia  New Zealand  Panama  Taiwan  Thailand  US    M3046 69564   453563333491   Exchange Wireless Assembly for Singapore country code  France  Mexico   Singapore     M3046 69566   453563333501   Exchange Wireless Assembly for Spain    M3046 69567   453563333511   Exchange Wireless Assembly for ETSI countries with a UK country code   Austria  Belgium  Czech Republic  Denmark   Finland  Germany  Greece   Iceland  India  Ireland  Italy  Luxembourg  Netherlands  Norway  Portugal   Russia  Sweden  Switzerland  Turkey  UK     M3046 69568   453563333521   Exchange Wireless Assembly for Japan  M3046 69569   453563333531   Exchange Wireless Assembly for South Korea       Replacement Parts 273    Battery and Battery Related Parts    Battery and Battery Related Parts    Battery Parts    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number    M3080  C32 12V Adapter    Battery Exchange Parts       12 Digit  Reordering Description  Number    M3046 68302 453563333321 Exchange Battery   06      Battery Charger and Conditioner Parts    Exchange Part  Number       12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description       Number    M8043 60000 453563498901 Smart Battery Charger and Conditioner   New    M8043 60010 451261001281 Replacement Kit  2 Air Fans   2 Filter Mats  M8043 60011 451261001291 Replacement Kit  2 Filter Mats    M8043 68000 453563498911 S
98. a few times  then the red and green LEDs will turn off and the yellow LED  will turn on during self test  If everything is operating properly  the yellow LED will go off  and only the green LED will be on     If the red status LED turns on during self test  there is a hardware problem with the wireless    assembly  includes a CPU board and a radio card   If a hardware failure is found during  operation the red LED will blink repeatedly     The Status LEDs are yellow directly after Power On  during initialization  During normal  operation they are green  If a problem occurs during operation the LEDs blink red in a  repeating pattern     Radio LED    The radio LED blinks yellow when the wireless assembly 15 transmitting data packets over its  radio     Sync LED    This LED should be on solidly during normal operation  It indicates that the M3 is  synchronized with an Access Point     NOTE This LED may blink occasionally even when the unit is synchronized to a master     Internal Link LED  This LED indicates that there is an internal connection to the M3 System Board  This LED  blinks when the wireless assembly sends packets through the internal connection to the    system board     NOTE This LED may blink on occasion even if the link between the Ethernet Adapter and the  System Board is defective     Troubleshooting the Instrument 171    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    172    Troubleshooting the Measurement Server LEDs    The Measurement Server LEDs can be seen from the re
99. aking the Config Files Writeable     If the serial cable connecting the configuring PC to the device or the PC s COM port is  inaccessible or not working  one of the following windows will be displayed     WirelessT ool       Input line  0   matchText      e Communication Timeout has occured while processing the following input   inputT ester  waikT inme 1500       Make sure the cable is plugged in  and the device is powered        Then configure again           For Wireless Adapter      Check the serial cable and its connections carefully to assure that a good interconnection is  being made    e Ensure that no other applications in the configuring PC have control of its Serial Port  e g   Hyperterminal   Close all other applications       Ensure that the proper COM port is selected in the Configuration Tool window     If configuring a Wireless Adapter     Turn the Wireless M3 M4 Monitor Off and then On and ensure that it passes its self test   Restart the Configuration Tool and try the procedure again     86 Installing the Instrument    Connecting to the ECG Output      Marker Input    Connecting to the ECG Output or Marker Input    See the specifications for the ECG Output and for the Marker Input under Interfaces in the  Monitor Performance Specifications section of the Specifications chapter of the Instructions  for Use  and the documentation for the device you are connecting     Configuring the Monitor    See the Basic Operation chapter and the Configuration chapter of t
100. al      Troubleshooting the Instrument    Tutorial for Troubleshooting the Instrument    Question    According to this chapter  what troubleshooting support functions are built in to  the Instrument     a  The Status Log and error codes are the only built in troubleshooting support  functions     b  The Coldstart Test  Display Test  Backlight Test  Reset PumpOpTime  Reset  IRSourceTime  Self Test Cycles  OpTimeMon  OpTimeMeasS  and        Cycles  are the only built in troubleshooting support functions     c  The Status Log  error codes  Coldstart Test  Display Test  Backlight Test  Reset  PumpOp Time  Reset IRSourceTime  Self Test Cycles  OpTimeMon   OpTimeMeasS  and        Cycles are all built in troubleshooting support  functions     Question 2  Which of the following support functions display information only  either  operating time or number of cycles for parts or features of the Instrument  and cannot be  modified     a  The Self Test Cycles  OpTimeMon  OpTimeMeasS and NBP Cycles are  selections which display this type of information and cannot be modified     b  The Coldstart Test  Display Test  Reset PumpOpTime  Reset IRSourceTime and  Backlight Test display this type of information and cannot be modified     c  The Line Frequency indicator displays this type of information and cannot be  modified     d  None of the above examples are correct     Question 3  There are LEDs available for visual observation during troubleshooting  Where  are they located    a  On the fro
101. al and displayed on the Monitor    On the M3015A Measurement Server Extension   Gas Input    On the Measurement Server  ECG Data Out is the analog ECG signal  sent out from the Monitor to a defibrillator or other external device  such  as an intra aortic balloon pump    On the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  Gas Outlet Exhaust    On the Monitor  Data Output to serial recorder    Serial interface socket for connection to recorder  M30464A  J16 only     Alternating Current    Equipotential Grounding Post  see Equipotential Grounding earlier in this  chapter     Battery Compartment    Type CF Applied Part and defibrillator proof with special protection  against electric shocks for intracardiac application  regarding allowable  leakage currents by having an F Type isolated or floating section      Indicates a Monitor with Wireless LAN Interface  symbol appears on  carrying handle     Class 2 Radio equipment identifier  1999 5 EC     67    Preparing to Install the Monitor    68    The following are the markings on the back of the Monitor     CLASS 1  LASER    PRODUCT                This device complies  with FCC part 15  of the FCC rules     Operation is subject to   the following two conditions    1  this device may not  cause harmful interference   and    2  this device must accept  any interference received   including interference that  may cause undesired    operation   Prod No  M3046A Opt  SN  XXXXXXXXXX  TAA RAI  ES TT Radio module inside           FCC ID IMKRL2630M  D
102. all the Monitor you must make sure it has an adequate power supply  see  Preparing to  Install the Monitor  on page 64 for information about AC power  and the  Using Your  Monitor in Patient Transport  chapter in the  nstructions for Use for information about using  batteries      Installing the Instrument    Connecting the Measurement Server       Switch the Monitor on using the On Off Standby button     On Off Standby        cu LL         Making the Altitude Setting    A correct altitude setting is important to ensure accurate CO  readings     Step 1    Step 2    Enter Config Mode and press the Setup key     Select Altitude    Step    Select the value from the list which is closest to the altitude of the hospital     Connecting the Measurement Server          With the Measurement Server directly on the Monitor    You can connect the Measurement Server to the Monitor by mounting it directly on the    Monitor     Step 1          sure that your Monitor has a link bar     Installing the Instrument        Link Bar    Plug to  Measurement Server  If your Monitor does not have a link bar     a  Position the link bar as shown in the diagram above   Make sure that the guide is in the slot under the plug  which connects to the  Measurement Server      b  Press the Link Bar into position until it clicks     71    Connecting the Measurement Server       72    c  Turn the latch guard to lie perpendicular across the edge of the latch     Step 2 Place the Measurement Server on the back of
103. an Additional Display    An additional display must be installed by an Philips Medical Systems service engineer or  authorized Service Representative  By the addition of a display  the M3 M4 Monitor becomes  a system and must be safety tested as such after installation  The required tests are described  in    Testing the Instrument    on page 137     Displays    In situations where the additional display is situated outside of the medically used room   see IEC 60601 1 1   the additional protective earth connection is a requirement  or  alternatively  electrical isolation must be provided by using a separation device  depending on the value of the measured enclosure leakage current     Any display which meets the specifications for the VGA interface may be used with your  monitor  When connected to the patient monitor  these displays  along with any other Class I  non medical equipment  must comply with IEC 60950 and with IEC 60601 1 1 when  connected to the M3 M4 Monitor     If the resulting enclosure leakage current of the display exceeds the value laid down by IEC  60601 1 60601 1 1  then certain action needs to be taken to ensure that the system as a whole  meets safety standards that are equivalent to those contained in IEC 60601 1 60601 1 1     What action to take depends on the measured enclosure leakage current of the display  and  where the display is located  is it in the patient vicinity  outside the patient vicinity but still in    the medically used room  or outsi
104. and Solving Instrument Problems                                 177       177  Isolating the Defective Component                                         183  Part 3 Using Support Functions          0 0 0    ccc eee ene eens 197  The Status  Log and Error                                                     197  ELCO ENO C           ec eae drca ub eee             199  Testing Wireless Network Connectivity                                         204                               peed ae hae mdr Ph eed ae 204         Set VCO              206  Service Mode Hardware Vests    2 cree ER oe uber ede ERE re 206  How To Access the Monitor and Server Revision Screen                        209  Troubleshooting the Installed                                                           210  Troubleshooting with Self Test Alarm Messages   When You Switch the Monitor                                           210  Troubleshooting When There 15 No Message on the Screen                      213  Troubleshooting During After a Software Upgrade                              4 214  Troubleshooting the Printer Connection                                         214  Troubleshooting the Recorder Connection                                       215  Tutorial for Troubleshooting the                                                        217  Answers to the Tutorial for Troubleshooting the Instrument                         218  6 Repairing the Instrument                                   219     iu TT 219  
105. ansducer being used can be determined by recognising the coding in the connector   This is done by the transducer detection circuitry  A window comparator checks the input  voltages provided by the transducer against specified limits     Current Source    The current source generates a constant current for the resistor array that 15 used to measure  the temperature     Resistor Array    The constant current is fed through four resistors in series  A test resistor  the externally  connected temperature probe  a gain calibration resistor  and an offset resistor  The voltage  drop across each resistor is sequentially measured and digitized  The CPU controls the  measurement of the different voltage drops and the ADC     Analog to Digital Converter  ADC     The ADC receives the pressure signal from the Input Protection Network and the temperature  signal from the Resistor Array  The ADC amplifies  filters  and digitizes the received  pressure or temperature signal  The CPU controls the A D conversion and accesses the  digitized data for further processing     Central Processing Unit  CPU     The CPU controls the ADC and receives the digitized pressure or temperature data from the  ADC  The CPU calculates the temperature values and scales the raw pressure waveform  using stored pressure calibration data  The CPU stores pressure calibration data and user  settings into a non volatile read write storage device  The scaled pressure waveform and  temperature data are communicated to t
106. any  contact with the monitor while AC power is connected     The green LED on the Display Adapter Board can be seen if the chassis is removed from the  plastic housing  It is located on the left side  speaker side  looking through the lower hole of  the metal display holder and can be seen below the brown flex cable which connects the  Display Adapter Board and the TFT panel  Its conditions are as follows       The Display Adapter Board LED switches on for approximately 3 seconds following a reset  of the System Board      If the Display Adapter Board LED does not switch on after a reset  this is an indication that  the flat ribbon cable to the Display Assembly is not seated correctly     Troubleshooting the Wireless Assembly LEDs    The Wireless Assembly LEDs can be seen when the gray cover on the right side of the  monitor  above the link bar  is open             R                Status                 Radio c  Y   Sync r3      G  Link       Service Connector J13    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Status LEDs    NOTE If all three status LEDs  the Radio LED and the Internal Link LED are on continuously and  the Sync LED is off  then this indicates that the Monitor has turned off the radio and is  communicating over the hardwired LAN connection  a cable is plugged into the LAN  RJ   45  connector on the rear of the Monitor     There are three status LEDs  one red   one yellow and one green  At power up  all three LEDs  flash on and off 
107. applicable for every measurement input   ECG   RESP  Invasive Pressure  CO    SpO    Temperature     Reporting safety test S 3  in the Service record  S 3  P x   Or   S 3  F x    where P   Pass       Fail and x 15 the value defined in the test described above    Testing the Instrument    Testing the Instrument    Tutorial for Testing the Instrument    Tutorial for Testing the Instrument    Question 1  According to this chapter  which of these statements correctly identifies the  distinction between Preventive Maintenance and Performance Testing     a  Performance testing includes safety testing and checks  It refers to all accuracy  and performance tests to be made on the Instrument other than NBP calibration_  and sidestream CO  calibration     b  When authorized Philips personnel service the Instrument  they report the results  of Preventive Maintenance testing back to Philips  The collected data forms a  database to be used in product development  It is not necessary for hospital  personnel to report results     c  Preventive Maintenance can be defined as service calibration testing required to  make sure the Instrument measurement results are accurate  These specific tests  are required for the        parameter and for the sidestream        parameter     d  All of the above answers are correct     Question 2  In the case of all testing procedures done either by hospital staff or by authorized  Philips personnel  what should be done with the results     a  File them for re
108. ar view of the Instrument     Measurement Server LEDs    Red      Yellow      Green          The functions of the three LEDs in the Server are identical to the three LEDs on the    Instrument System Board      5V power LED   When on  this  LEd indicates the presence of  5       Main CPU status LED   When on  and blinking  this LED indicates  normal CPU operation    Starts to blink 2 times per second  after the red Error LED switches  off then slows down to blink 1 time  per second after the red Error LED  switches off when the system boot  has finished  approximately 2 sec   onds      Error LED   When on  this LED  indicates an error    This LED switches on for about 1  second after a System Board reset  then switches off        Off  Check Power Supply  and associated cabling   Go to the troubleshooting  section     If permanently on or off   indicates a hung CPU      Reload software     Exchange system board     If permanently on  the  Server is probably defec   tive     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    First Steps    The first two steps are to make sure that the paths AC power supply and battery to  5V  System Board supply voltages work correctly     What To Do if the Monitor Cannot Be Switched On  AC powered      Remove the battery      Connect AC power  The AC Power LED should switch on within several seconds    e Switch the Instrument on  The On Off Standby LED should switch on      If either the AC Power LED or the On Off Standby LE
109. atient Monitor Texts    for a translation of the English text into the localized language        Site Preparation Guidelines    Although the Instrument  Monitor and Measurement Server or  where present  Measurement  Server Extension  is primarily a portable Monitor  some site preparation must be done before  using it in certain locations  Additionally  good operating practices are also recommended     e Check that the operating environment is reasonably free from dust  vibration  corrosive or  explosive gases and is within specified temperature and humidity ranges     e Position the Instrument so that the display is clearly visible and the controls are easy to  reach     e The M3046A MUST be grounded during operation  If a three wire receptacle is not availa   ble then a hospital electrician must be consulted to ensure that proper grounding is available  on installation  NEVER attempt to use a three wire to a two wire adapter with the  M3046A  The Instrument must be grounded whenever it is connected to the mains power  using a 3 pin plug     Installing the Instrument 97    Mounting Solutions    Mounting Solutions    The mounting solutions described in this manual are subject to change  For the latest  information  please visit the Patient Monitoring section of the Philips Medical Systems  website  and follow the links to mounting solutions     For detailed mounting instructions  refer to the documents supplied with the mounting  hardware     Installing the Table Mount  M3080A
110. be exchanged     Checking and Resetting Time Counters    The time counters on the sidestream CO  Extension must be checked before calibrating the  Instrument  As well  when parts are replaced  the appropriate counters must be reset to zero   applies to units with serial number prefix DEO20xxxxx only      To check the counters  do the following     Step 1 Select the counter you want to check  either Reset IRSourceTime or Reset  PumpOpTime      Step 2 Press and hold lightly on the TouchStrip  The counter time will display     Step 3 Release to view or press harder to reset  In addition  always observe the following  guidelines      When calibrating the CO   Extension  if no parts have been replaced  check the val   ues displayed on the Reset PumpOpTime and Reset IRSourceTime  selections to make sure that they are within suggested guidelines for use  15  000  hours of use   If the counter time is greater than 15  000 hours  replace the appro   priate part  See  Repairing the Instrument       When calibrating the CO   Extension  if parts have been replaced  reset the  appropriate values displayed on the Reset PumpOpTime and Reset  IRSourceTime selections to zero  See  Repairing the Instrument      Testing the Instrument 153    Preventive Maintenance Tests    NOTE When      PumpOpTime has been reset an INOP will be generated     CO  OCCLUSION     To  clear this INOP  you must perform a flow check and store the flow in Service Mode  select     Store Flow       Documenting CO  Test 
111. be exchanged     Disconnect the flowmeter from the Part 1 setup and connect the flowmeter inlet to  the M3015A gas outlet     Leave the Filterline connected to the M3015A inlet     Testing the Instrument    Preventive Maintenance Tests    Step 10 Block the inlet of the FilterLine using your fingertip and observe the flowmeter  display  The value on the flowmeter  x3  should decrease to between    and 4 ml   min  accompanied by an audible increase in pump noise   Do not block the inlet for  longer than 25 seconds as this will lead to an    Occlusion    INOP   If the value is  within the tolerance limits  there are no leakages and the leakage check is  completed  proceed to the Pump Check     Step 11 If the value 15 not within the tolerance limits  there is a leakage between the  FilterLine inlet and the pump inlet     Step 12 Check the FilterLine connections and open the M3015A to check the tubing  connections at the pump inlet and the M3015A gas inlet  If the connections are  good  try replacing the FilterLine and repeating the leakage check  If the situation  remains  there is a leakage in the tubing and the M3015A must be exchanged     Pump Check  Step 1 Connect the flowmeter inlet to the M3015A gas outlet   Step 2 Connect the FilterLine to the M3015A inlet     Step 3 Block the inlet of the FilterLine using your fingertip and observe the cell pressure  on      M3046A display  The cell pressure  x4  should be more than 120 mmHg  below the ambient pressure shown  If the press
112. ble to isolate and solve problems which may occur in the    Instrument     Symptom    Cause of Failure    System related problems    The battery  symbol is not  displayed     Some or all  numerics or  waves are not  displayed     Monitor screen  appears dim     Troubleshooting the Instrument    A battery is not present in  the Monitor  the battery is  defective  or there 1s a bad  connection     Parameters are switched  off    No transducers are con   nected     Defective transducer   Unsupported server     Server defective     Brightness not properly  adjusted     Display backlight tubes  worn        Install a charged battery  If  a battery is already  present  remove it and  check the charge level   press the button on the  battery   Refit the battery  making sure to push it  completely into position     Switch parameters on   Connect the required  transducers     Replace the suspect trans   ducer    Check for message  No  Measurements or Meas   urement Server Not Sup   ported  See previous  remedy     Exchange the Server    Adjust brightness     Replace backlight tubes     183    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    184    Monitor screen  is blank     Monitor screen  is blank but the  Instrument  appears to boot  as it should   alarm LEDs  switch on off   successful test  sound  and yel   low LED on the  System Board  blinks     Power not connected or  not switched on  Battery is  not installed  15 empty        battery fuse is blown     AC Fuse 15 blown     
113. bove     No action  required    No action  required    It is recom   mended to    5    Sepa   ration  device   even if the  measured  enclosure  leakage  current  does not  exceed the  value laid  down by  IEC 60601    1 1    Additional  protective  earth OR  separation  device  required    Additional  protective  earth OR  separation  device  required    Separation  device  between  the medical  device and  the non   medical  device  required       Separation  device  required    Separation  device  required    Separation  device  between  the medical  device and  the non   medical  device  required        gt   lt    Separation device    91    Installing an Additional Display    WARNING    CAUTION    92    Where separation transformer is required  the power cable connection to the display must  be secured so that the transformer cannot be disconnected by hand     Where an additional protective earth is required  the grounding cable must be screwed to the  protective earth connector on the rear of the Monitor  see the illustration below under     Installation    on page 92   The other end of the grounding cable must be connected to ground   earth  with a screwed connection     Safety Specification    Enclosure leakage current for the combination of M3046A monitor  additional display and  isolation transformer must meet the following requirements     IEC 60601 1 500 microamps  uA  rms at 264V  50 60 Hz  UL 2601 1 300 microamps  uA  rms at 240V  60 Hz    CSA   22 2  601 1 500 m
114. cc cece creer cc eccee 119  CIT     119            Oe dug oma ee ete ee oe 119  Recommendations for Maintenance Frequency                                   120  Maintenance Clhiec KESE uo Ld tat an ii ene eee Sn eod e oe ad RE      tae 121       Contents    Inspecting             osos a on      etn EG a ee EIER eee      d 122    Inspect Cables and Cords        e e tex abr    dod QE      SU A 122  Preventive Maintenance                                     dte wd 123  hub D TP rr  uec 123                                                   123  Replacement of      Pump and CO                                                   125  Replacement of the Infrared Lamp            0 0    ccc ccc         125  General Cleaning    of tie Instre  rtie BiE                            des ss 125  Cleans            ae the ee c 125  Cleans                                  aub Ma  CC al PA CCS Go Sta bibe db ESL RSS Od 126  Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good                                                 127  About the Balteky  2424205 am ct RE HR S ar    SOR eo ee ee ea 127  Checkins the  Battery Status uda reb e ox dep e onde Badd wae aea te aes 127  Charen The         esce te ru Ine oak           FE d DAE oe a  da aha         Sept ee 129  Conditioning a Battery  Jen  ah So ASR n ox cava qud ob do Rem a diae ied BO us 130  Accessing the Battery Status Window                                       132  Battery INOP  Messages        Ea bx cite deeb AER ER EE S ESAE             ERA EE 134  Tuto
115. cessing module  A special test mode and a zero procedure can be enabled and preformed  on request  The module also performs various self tests and consistency checks to ensure  proper operation and reports errors and failures to the Acquisition Module     Introduction to the Instrument 41    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    Acquisition Control    This component receives the hardware related information from the signal acquisition  component  This includes status data and error failure reports     Wave Processing    The raw waveform from the Signal Acquisition module is filtered  Gain and offset values of  the raw waveform are corrected so that the wave sample values represent absolute values  according to the selected scale     Beat Detector    The Beat Detector determines the position of a beat in the pulsatile pressure waveform  This  information is used to calculate systolic  diastolic  and mean beat pressure values and to  calculate pulse rate     Average Calculation    The calculated beat pressure and pulse values are averaged and converted to the user selected  measurement unit  mmHg or kPa      Pressure Alarming    This component generates the appropriate alarm when the averaged pressure or pulse values  exceed the user selected alarm limits  Technical alarms are generated when the Acquisition  Control component detects errors or failures     Pressure Pulse User Controls  This component controls the user selected settings       Change
116. con   nector board  If it is lost  after 3 hours  the buffer 1s  defective     Defective printer     Infrared connection 1  not  correctly aligned   Defective sender     Tone 1s switched low or  off     ECG Analog Output is  defective     Defib sync input circuit is  defective     Replace the front panel  Monitor Bezel     Replace the System  Board     Go to the Service Mode  and perform the extended  test  If the extended test  fails  replace the System  Board    If a battery is in  remove it  and put in new data     Replace the connector  board and put in some  patient data  If this does  not correct the fault   replace the System Board     Try printing with another  Monitor    Line up the sender and  receiver     Try another Monitor Bezel  and replace if necessary   Check cable   Check exchange the Sys   tem Board     Switch Monitor off then  on again  Tone should  sound when Monitor first  boots up    Check cable and connec   tions to the speaker     Replace the System  Board     See ECG Sync Perform   ance Test        185    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Incorrect Time The Instrument   s real time   Power on for a few min   Stamps clock 1s defective  utes then reset the time  and date     Replace the System  Invalid data Board   stored showing  wrong times for  data     Cannot repro  Defective System Board    Replace the System  gram the time Board    and date   correctly    Compatibility related problems     Some measure    A measurement extension 
117. converter     Exciter and Infrared Source  The exciter generates a high frequency  high voltage signal to ignite the infra red source and    to generate the infrared radiation needed to measure the CO  concentration in the  measurement cell     Introduction to the Instrument 51    Sidestream        Measurement    52    Detectors    The detectors are used to detect the reference signal  the signal which comes directly from  the IR source  and the main signal  the signal which passes through the sample cell      Pressure Sensor    The pressure sensor is used to measure the ambient pressure during the auto zero process and  to measure the pressure in the measurement cell during measurement mode     Analog Section    The analog section amplifies and digitizes the main  reference  pressure and temperature  signals     Controller and Peripherals  The controller reads the digitized values from the analog section and calculates the       wave  and numerics based on the measured main  reference  pressure and temperature signals  The    controller also controls the CO   frontend based on the control information received from the  Measurement Server  the Optical Code Recognition and the measured cell pressure     Gas Inlet with Optical Code Recognition    The gas inlet allows the connection of Microstream FilterLines  The Microstream FilteLines  are detected by the Optical Code Recognition     Serial Interface with FELP  The Serial Interface and Frontend Link Protocol  FELP  provide the
118. correctly into the backlight inverter      Check the backlight tubes are working correctly  broken  damaged  or worn        f the display still remains dark either the Display Assembly or the System Board is defec   tive  It is recommended to replace the Display Assembly first     174 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    What To Do if the Alarm and Suspend LEDs Are Not Working Correctly    If the Monitor boots until the display is switched on but the Alarm LED and the Suspend  LED have not switched as described previously  red  red yellow then off   suspect the  following       Check that the Monitor Bezel cable 15 seated correctly     Replace the Monitor Bezel     Replace the System Board     Isolating Problems to the Correct Subassembly    WARNING High Voltage   Voltages dangerous to life are present in the Instrument when it is  connected to the mains power supply  Do not perform any disassembly procedures   other than Server and Extension removal  with power applied to the Instrument   Failure to adhere to this warning could cause serious injury or death     Troubleshooting the ECG OUT    If no marker pulse is displayed on the Monitor  assuming the defibrillator and defibrillator  cable are in working order   check the following       Disconnect the Server and Defib cable    e Switch the Monitor off then on again  Observe the red LED in the ECG OUT section   The  Instrument Self Test is performed        f the red LED does not switch on fo
119. cover        Step 5 Release the cover     Step 6 Prise open the clip on the Server to Monitor link bar and slide it off  On newer  monitors just turn the catch  holding the link bar  into the vertical position        222 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly for the Monitor    Step 7 Lay the Monitor on its rear panel and pull out the two latches   there is        on each  side of the Monitor Bezel        Step 8 Stand the Monitor up again and gently lift the Monitor Bezel up and out  Gently let  it rest in front of the Monitor  Be careful  It still has a cable attached        Step 9 Remove the white plastic clamp securing the ribbon cable connections  To remove   push the latch at the top left corner to the left     Step 10 Use a small screwdriver to remove the Monitor Bezel assembly cable   NOTE Do not touch the LCD display       Repairing the Instrument 223    Disassembly for the Monitor    Step 11 Remove the four screws from the rear panel        Step 12 Slide the chassis slowly out from the front of the housing  the battery compartment  cover must be open   and lay the chassis on the Monitor Bezel  For Monitors with a Wireless LAN Assembly  To avoid antenna damage  slide  the chassis very carefully out from the front of the housing  disconnect the antenna  cable and lay the chassis on the Monitor Bezel        Removing the System Board  To remove the System Board  do the following   Step 1 Remove the Power Supply as described previously in this chapter     Step 2 Remove t
120. cted to an  M3046A Monitor with  Rev  D or lower software   This conbination does not  allow monitoring     Or   M3000A Measurement  Server 1s connected to an  M3046A Monitor with  Rev  E software  This con   bination does not allow  monitoring        Use only M3000A Meas   urement Servers with  M3046A Monitors with  Rev  D or lower software     Use only M3001A Meas   urement Servers with  M3046A Monitors with  Rev  E software        Power Supply related problems    See Troubleshooting the Front Panel LEDs earlier in this chapter     Display and LCD Adapter Board related problems    Monitor screen  is blank     Fluid dripping  or appearing  below Instru   ment     Decrease in  light intensity  on display   Brightness  decreases from  top to bottom or  bottom to top     Instrument appears to boot  as it should  alarm LEDs  switch on off  successful  test sound  and yellow  LED on the System Board  blinks     Display and other cables  not seated correctly     LCD assembly damaged  or cracked     One of the two backlight  tubes is worn     See Troubleshooting the  System Board LEDs ear   lier in this chapter     Refit cables correctly     If this does not work   replace the LCD Display  Assembly     Replace the LCD Display  Assembly     Replace both backlight  tubes  Although it is unu   sual for both tubes to need  replacing at the same  time  you are recom   mended to do so since  replacement is not easy        Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Ins
121. ction to the Instrument 27    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    28    ECG Alarming   This software receives the averaged heart rate from the cardiotach software and derives  alarms by comparing this rate against the limits and the asystole condition  Heart rate  alarms are communicated to the display unit via the operating system     ECG Controls   This software handles    selection of ECG leads   setting of heart rate alarm limits   selection of ECG display filter characteristics    Respiration Artifact Suppression   This software receives the respiration and ECG waves from the ECG Resp CPU  A  software filter removes any potential ECG overlay from the respiration wave  The filtered  respiration waveform is communicated to the display unit via the operating system     Breath Detector   This software detects the respiration rate using a trigger threshold that is dynamically  adjusted according to the amplitude of the wave  The time between breaths is measured and  the respiration rate is calculated  This is communicated directly to the Resp alarming  and  via the operating system to the display unit     Resp Alarming   This software receives the respiration rate from the breath detector and derives alarms by  comparing this rate against the limits and the apnea condition  Respiration rate alarms are  communicated to the display unit via the operating system     Respiration Controls   This software handles    setting of respiration rate alarm limits   sca
122. ctions support the recorder manager and provide it with graphics  capabilities  The output from the recorder manager suports the GSI Lumonics XE 50p   specific serial protocol  and output is fed to the local recorder  which is connected via a  dedicated serial cable  The recorder manager displays prompt and status messages on the  monitor s color LCD display     Introduction to the Instrument    Monitor Theory of Operation    IrDA Serial Communication Manager    The IrDA Serial Communication manager is responsible for sending raw data to the local  recorder  serial protocol  or printer  in a format that complies with the IrDA  Infrared Data  Association  standard   The IrDA Serial Communication manager provides a general printer  or recorder device interface to the printer or recorder manager  and maps the general printer   recorder services to the device protocol  The general printer services are as follows       Establishing and terminating the printer recorder connection     Transferring data to the printer recorder     Retrieving the printer recorder status     The IrDA Serial Communication manager feeds the printer recorder status  time out  paper  out  and so on  back to the printer or recorder manager  which in turn notifies the user of any  errors in the print record process     Communication Software Module    The communication module maintains a data link between the Monitor  the Measurement  Server and the Measurement Server Extension  and controls the exchange of 
123. d     When the PumpOpTime has been reset an INOP will be generated     CO  OCCLUSION   To  clear this INOP you must perform a flow check and store the flow in Service Mode  select     Store Flow      The effectiveness of the Pump gradually decreases over time  As a result  periodic  replacement is necessary  applies to units with serial number prefix DEO20xxxxx only    Philips recommends replacement of the Pump as follows    e After 15 000 to 20 000 hours  max 20 000 hours       If the flow cannot be adjusted to the desired value       If the Pump makes considerably more noise than new Pumps     After replacing the pump  perform a CO  calibration check as described in  CO2 Gas  Measurement Calibration Check  on page 152     When replacing the pump in the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  sidestream CO     you should also replace the CO  scrubber at the same time   Recorder Status Check    You can check the status of the recorder by entering Service Mode  then pressing  the Local Record SmartKey   The firmware version  FV   voltage  V   and  gt     temperature at the printhead  T  are printed out  Local  Recorc  FV4 1  V11 9  T 36    Self Test Cycles  information only     The number of executed Self Test cycles since the last reboot is displayed  but cannot be  modified     OpTime Mon  information only     The cumulative time that the Monitor has been operated is shown  but cannot be modified     Op TimeMeasS  information only     The cumulative time the Measurement Server 
124. d on Power Supply Board    Only type     SCHURTER  SPT0001 2506        M3046 60101    453563332701 Metal Chassis assembly    N A Standard Plastic Housing    N A Wireless Plastic Housing  USA Canada    N A Wireless Plastic Housing  rest of world   IA i i    IA i i      M3046A  A10    M3046A  A20    M3046A    21    M3046 60202    453563332721 Display assembly    Monitor Display Backlight tube  for display ass  M3046   60201   Monitor Display Backlight tube  for display ass  M3046   60202     2090 0577 N    2090 0380 N    M3046 66521  M3046 66522  M3046 44107  M3046 44109  M3046 64105  M3046 61601  M3046 44103  M3046 47411  M3080 61602  M3080 61603  M3046 55900  M3046 42310  M1022 60170    N    50 Replacement Parts    Monitor Parts    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number    M3046 60601 453563334651 Shield for wireless LAN operation  M3046 61301 453563332741 Loudspeaker  M3046 44102 453563332611 M3 cover power supply    M3046 66502 453563333141 Monitor System Board  English software preloaded   Rev A      M3046 60001 453563332681 Monitor Power Supply assembly  old   M3046 60002 453563332691 Monitor Power Supply assembly  new     M3046 63201 453563484761 Table top mount  also adapter plate for rollstand  M3080A  A10      M3046 44110 453563484821 Removable Frame for the serial connector  M3046 64102 453563333091   Small Parts Kit  See separate table on page 253       a  Use the M3 M4 Support Tool to configure the software      a specific release language  if necessa
125. data between  them  This data includes the following       Measurement data   e status information   e Control information     Configuration data     Support Services    The support services software module contains miscellaneous functions that both the  Monitor  the Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension require  These  functions are as follows       Date and Time    e Settings Handler    e Status Revision and Display     Heart Rate Selector     Introduction to the Instrument 15    Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware    Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware    The Monitor receives data from the Measurement Server and Measurement Server Extension  via the Server to Monitor link bar and presents this data on the color LCD display  The  following block diagram shows the main functional areas     Alarm LAN  Relay VGA  Network     48V   AC    AC present Optional    Smart Battery       Power Supply              6 Pin 5 Pin  Connector Connector  E                    Optional  Vbat 48V present Wireless LAN  e       ltem    8 D Connector       140 Pin  System Board              Vies ee T     Ventilator  DC DC Converter Fan  48V current limiter CPU System 360   Battery charger      oe  Flash SRAM DRAM  SRL to  Controller  Measurement  z Server             4  M3000A   48Vlim 45V     Vbuf E  A  HIF 83C552    TouchStrip  Keys  Sound     M LEDs  Alarm Relay  Video ECG  Battery  Controller   Marker I Out  5 Controller   3  8  4      d 3       Vom       
126. de of the medically used                The following two tables show what action to take     Resulting Earth Leakage Current of the Non   Medical Device    Normal Single Fault  Condition Condition       Installing the Instrument    Medically  Outside  Patient Vicinity Y    Medically   Used Room  Used Room                          Here the patient monitor is  connected to a non medical device   display   and both pieces of  equipment are within the patient  vicinity  within 1 5m of the patient      Here the patient monitor is connected to a non   medical device  display  that is outside the patient  vicinity  but within the medically used room       PE         Hazardous situations may occur if the signal line of the patient  monitor is connected to equipment outside of the medically used  room  for example  in another building with a different mains supply  circuit    A separation device  for example  an separation transformer   included in the signal line prevents a hazard to the patient or user  It  should be placed as near as practicable to the medical electrical  equipment  The inclusion of a separation device also helps to avoid  hazards through malfunction of equipment caused by unwanted  ground loop currents flowing through the signal line   Key  PE   Protective  V    Potential difference  Earth between different localities    Installing the Instrument       Installing an Additional Display    Action Required Following Earth    Leakage Current Measurement   See Table a
127. details      The Monitor and Measurement Server Extension can be disassembled see    Repairing the  Instrument    on page 219     e There is no metal moulded into the plastic case  and no metal sprays on the plastic   All plastic parts with a weight greater than 10g  0 35 ounces  are marked with the ISO code  for identification   All labelling on the product has been done by laser printing  so no separation 15 necessary  before recycling      The sheet metal card cage uses only one kind of steel      The handle is a 2 compound moulding  separable by the application of force      The screen has a touch resistor laminate  separable by the application of force      User documentation and Service documentation are wire o bound  The binding is separable  by the application of force   No heavy metals were used in printing the documentation      The cardboard and foam used in packaging are 10046 recyclable   No heavy metals were used in printing the packaging     Installing the Instrument 115    Tutorial for Installing the Instrument    Tutorial for Installing the Instrument    Question 1  For patient safety  where and how should monitoring equipment be mounted     a  Do not mount any portion of monitoring equipment over a patient   s bed     b  Lead expansion bolts are neither adequate nor safe to use when mounting  equipment on plaster board walls     c  It is important not to remove the channel safety stop on the GCX Wall Channel  while the mount is supporting monitoring equipmen
128. e     Installing the Instrument 99    Warnings  Cautions  and Safety Precautions Relating to Wall Mount Installation    Warnings  Cautions  and Safety Precautions Relating to  Wall Mount Installation      Make sure that you have read all applicable instructions before attempting to install the wall  mount     Wall mounts that are intended to support monitors must be capable of supporting four times  the weight of the Monitor when properly installed     If wall mounts are to be installed on plaster board walls  we recommend that the mounts be  installed using steel or plywood plates sufficient to distribute the load over a large section  of the wall  Lead expansion bolts are neither adequate nor safe for this purpose     It is the responsibility of the hospital  institution  or its designated representatives to deter   mine that the wall is adequate to safely mount monitoring instrumentation  This includes  the selection of and proper installation of the appropriate fasteners and mounts  In a new  construction  or in a remodelled construction where the wall can be completely or partially  removed  a 16 gauge steel stud should be mounted for the purpose of attaching the wall  channel  This design safety factor is based on four times  4x  the maximum rated load     GCX Wall Channel  Always reposition the adjustable channel safety stop under the  adapter plate when the height of the Instrument is changed     The channel safety stop prevents the mounting device from inadvertently 
129. e  2 o enable a printer connected through the network   Remote  3 o enable a printer connected through the network     a  The remote printer option is only available when the Monitor is con   nected to the M3 Print Server    b  If any Remote printers are available  there will always be three printers  shown irrespective of the actual number of printers connected via the       Print Server  The correlation to actual printers on the network is  configured at the M3 Print Server     Installing the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector   M3080A  H05     If the Monitor is to be used within the patient vicinity when it is connected to a printer  the  connection must only be made using the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector  To use this  you  need a Centronics printer extension cable     The Wireless Infrared Printer Connector provides an infrared printer connection from the  infrared equipped Monitor to a parallel printer by attaching to the standard parallel printer  connector and providing both a parallel and an infrared interface     To find out how to install the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector software  refer to the  accompanying documentation  Install the device support tray  supplied with kit  and  connector as follows     Infrared Access Point    to Power Supply    Support Tray    Distance A   Distance between the Patient and the Monitor   Distance B   Distance between the Wireless IR Printer Connector and the  Infrared Port on the Monitor   0  1 0     Distance C   Dista
130. e  Operation Failed    in the status line on the Monitor  Wait until the Monitor has completed the  current operation  then restart the service procedure     148 Testing the Instrument                Testing the Instrument    Preventive Maintenance Tests    This test checks the performance of the CO  measurement for the sidestream Extension  The  CO  performance test 15 required once per year and when the Instrument is repaired or when  parts are replaced     This test uses calibration equipment that can be ordered  see  Replacement Parts  for the part  number   The procedure is summarised in the following steps  Refer to the documentation  accompanying the equipment for detailed instructions     Tools Required    e Standard tools  e g  screwdriver  tweezers      Electronic flowmeter  M1026 60144     Gas calibration equipment       Cal 1 gas 15210 64010  5  CO       Cal 2 gas 15210 64020  10             Cal gas flow regulator M2267A     Cal tube 13907A    In addition you will need a local barometric pressure rating received from a reliable local  source  airport  regional weather station or hospital weather station  which is located at the  same altitude as the hospital     The CO  calibration for the sidestream Extension consists of the following steps       Barometric Pressure Check and Calibration  if required     Leakage Check     Pump Check     Flow Check and Calibration  if required      Noise Check     CO  Cal Check and Calibration  if required      CO  Cal Verificatio
131. e  connector  6  92  Speaker Assembly  193  SPEAKER MALFUNCTION  INOP description  179         Performance Test  157  SpO   NOISY SIGNAL message  180  SpO  PLETH  theory of operation  33  Standby  67  Start Stop button  7  Status Log  197  Support Functions  197    Index    Suspend button  5   Symptoms  183   System PCB related problems  183  System Self Test  144    T    TEMP EQUIP MALF message  211  Temp Press  Extension  setting P2 zero and  labels  45  53  Temperature  Accuracy check  155  theory of operation  37    temperature extremes  operating  environment   66  Tests    Index    checklist  141   reporting in service record  138  time  10  Time counters   resetting  153  touchstrip  5  TouchStrip problems  189  TouchStrip related problems  189  transducer connector  7  trickle charging  132  Troubleshooting Checklists  166    U  unpacking  70  UNSUPPORTED LAN    INOP description  179          vibration  66  Visual Test  142    W    wave  10  label  10    Z    Zero button  7  Zero key  45  53    277    
132. e  discharge of a charged battery by allowing it to die out while in non critical use   The empty battery may then be recharged and put back into use  The rechargeable  battery used in the Instrument must be conditioned every 50 cycles to prepare it  for further charge discharge cycles     Question 2  According to this chapter  which of the following statements are part of  inspecting the Instrument     a  Replaceable parts should be monitored for duration of continuous use  After  approximately 15 000 hours of continuous use  the parts should be replaced    b  All cables and cords should be inspected for damage and wear on a daily basis    c  All Instrument labeling should be present and legible     d  All of the above statements are correct according to this chapter     Question 3  Which of the following cleaners are acceptable for cleaning the Instrument     a  Dilute ammonia  dilute sodium hypochlorite  dilute formaldehyde  35 37     hydrogen peroxide  3    ethyl alcohol  and isopropyl alcohol    b  Steel wool     c  Povodine  Sagrotan  and Mucocit cleaning agents and acetone     Maintaining the Instrument 135    Answers to the Tutorial for Maintaining the Instrument    Answers to the Tutorial for Maintaining the Instrument    1  c   See pages 119 and 127 for more details    2  d   See page 122 for more details      3  a  See pages 125 and 126 for more details      136 Maintaining the Instrument    4 Testing the Instrument       Objectives    In order to meet this chapter
133. e 40 rpm     The value should be 40 rpm     2 rpm     Invasive Pressure Performance Test    This test checks the performance of the invasive pressure parameter  The Invasive Pressure  performance test is required once every two years     Tools required  Patient Simulator     Step 1    Step 2  Step 3    Step 4    Step 5    Step 6    Connect the Patient Simulator to the Pressure connector on the Measurement Server  or the Measurement Server Extension     Set Patient Simulator to O pressure    Make a zero calibration    Configure the Patient Simulator as follows       P static    200 mmHg    Wait for the display     The value should be 200 mmHg   5 mmHg  If the value is outside these tolerances   calibrate the Measurement Server or Measurement Server Extension     If the Measurement Server was calibrated with a dedicated reusable catheter  check the  calibration together with this catheter     Testing the Instrument    Accuracy and Performance Procedures    SpO  Performance Test    This test checks the performance of the SpO  parameter  The SpO  performance test is  required once every two years     Tools required  none    Step 1 Connect an adult SpO   transducer to the SpO  connector on the Measurement  Server     Step 2 Measure the SpO  value on your finger  this assumes that you are healthy      Step3 The value should be between 95  and 100     Mainstream CO  Performance Test   This test checks the performance of the mainstream CO  parameter  The mainstream CO   performance t
134. e C M3000A Measurement Server  must  be used in monitoring configurations where only Release B  C or D software equipment is  included  None of these parts are compatible with Release A software     The M3001A Multi Measurement Server is compatible only with the Release E M3046A  monitors  and is incompatible with any earlier releases     The Hemodynamic Extension M3012A is for use together with the Multi Measurement  Server M3001A  This combination supports the transfer of patient data between IntelliVue   M80xxA  and M3 MA  M3046A  Revision E  monitors  The M3012A   s Pressure   Temperature channel works in the same way as that of the M3001A  with which the M3012A  shares all specifications  as documented in the M3 MA Instructions for Use  except for the  weight  which is 450g  0 9916   See the table below for supported parameters  The M3012A  is not further covered in this Service Guide     To check which software revisions are on your equipment  enter Setup and select  Revisions     The Multi Measurement Server and Server Extensions acquire the following physiological  signals     which M3046A    Release   Measurement    Server Server  Extension  ithOption    EASI derived   12 Lead ECG  Respiration  Non Invasive  Blood Pressure  Oxygen Saturation  SpO    Invasive   Blood Pressure    M3000A                          M3000A    06    M3001A                   9       E   d  c  M  e             LEL    EL    A Introduction to the Instrument    Introducing the Instrument Componen
135. e same Extension        MAINSTREAM        Option  A01 only     A Quick Description of the Main Screen    Monitor Label QuickSet Time  Patient  Size 2  Non Paced Symbol    Patient Name N     ouickset 1 23 11     Alarms      Alarm Message           ANDREAS Adult Ed    Wi sian toe 7 0       100    Spo 5  fee eg iu a  f                          Wave Label NZS        BT              y 3 7 DE Alarm  Limits  TA Numeric      91  Label    Auto 60min 17 15 Resp    135 101   12 Alarm Off            Symbol   measurement        e      c           Start St      204  St 220          ar op NBP STAT op ore D         SmartKey Label Icon    You can return to the display with the waves and the numerics at any time by pressing the  blue Main Screen key     10 Introduction to the Instrument    Theories of Operation and Functional Descriptions    Theories of Operation and Functional Descriptions    The theories of operation and functional descriptions are presented in three sections   Section 1 Monitor Description      M3046A Monitor Theory of Operation        Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware  Section 2 M3001A M3000A Measurement Server Description and Features      Measurement Server Theory of Operation     Functional Description of the Measurement Server Hardware     Hlectrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement   e Non invasive Blood Pressure          Measurement     Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpOZ PLETH  Measurement     Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Tem
136. e screws to fasten the mounting flange to the wall   NOTE US version only  Fasten the rectangular wall mounting plate to the wall  Attach the mounting  flange to the wall mounting plate   Step 7 Mount the plastic cover  The plastic cover consists of two pieces   Frame  Angled cover    Put the frame over the mounting insert and the PCB  Place the angled cover on top  and fasten with two screws     Step 8 Connect the monitor and the measurement server to the wall installation     Step 9 Perform the following tests as described in the  Testing the Instrument  section of  this manual     Power on test blocks  Safety test blocks    ECG Sync Performance Test    114 Installing the Instrument    WARNING    Disposing of the Monitor  Measurement Server and Measurement Server Extensions    Disposing of the Monitor  Measurement Server and  Measurement Server Extensions    To avoid contaminating or infecting personnel  the service environment or other  equipment  make sure the equipment has been appropriately disinfected and  decontaminated before disposal     The battery can be easily removed  see    Maintaining the Instrument    on page 119 as well as  the    Using Your Monitor in Patient Transport  chapter in the Instructions for Use for  information on using batteries   and can be recharged for use with another machine or  when  no longer rechargeable  can be returned  free of charge  to the worldwide recycling program  run by the battery manufacturer  contact your local supplier for 
137. e self discharge of NiMH batteries is in the range of 20 25  per month       Trickle charging accelerates the aging of the battery and is not recommended for batteries  that are only used occasionally  In such cases the battery should be kept separate from the  monitor and charged every three to four months to prevent deep discharge  Deep discharge  occurs when the battery has a relative state of charge of 096     If you cannot avoid trickle charging  use the Battery Charger and Conditioner    8043    to  recondition the battery once a month  See the instructions that accompany the charger for  details on charger use     Trickle charging only takes place for batteries stored in a monitor connected to AC mains   You can leave batteries in the Battery Charger and Conditioner  M8043A   as no trickle  charging takes place     Accessing the Battery Status Window    The Battery Status window shows additional information about the battery  To access this  window  press the Setup key on the front panel and select Battery from the list  The Monitor  displays a screen similar to the following     Battery Status  Duracell TR36 12 0V SN 00292 0721 98 SBM 1 0    imeToEmpt 112 min um 10   est  1 min       apacity i Current 284 0 wah    remaining   1247 mAh Voltage                     fullCharge  1852 mAh Temperature  23 0 C  designed   2400 mAh Cycles   234       The meaning of the messages are described in the following paragraphs     Time to Empty   tThis refers to the approximate      1
138. e the  Measurement Server Extension or  for mainstream  CO    the transducer     BAD SERVER LINK You cannot use this combination of Monitor   Measurement Server and cable   Switch off the monitor and contact your biomedical  department     BAD SERVER LINK An M3000A Measurement Server with revision     plus software is connected to an M3046A Monitor with   Measurement Server a software revision of B or later  This combination  Revision not supported  does not allow monitoring    status message in red           Some measurements are A measurement extension  M3015A or M3016A  15   not supported by the connected to an M3046A M3 monitor    Monitor  prompt message No measurements  for example CO    2nd Press   Temp  from the Measurement Extension are  available     If the extra measurements are required  consider  using a monitor that supports these measurements     Troubleshooting the Instrument 211    Troubleshooting the Installed Instrument    Message     Measurement Server  Configuration not  supported    status message       Some measurements  in MMS Extension are  not supported    prompt  message       Measurement Server  not supported    status  message    212       What To Do    Either   A Measurement Extension  M3015A or  M3016A  is connected to a standard M3000A  Measurement Server  noninvasive measure   ments only  and an M3046A Monitor with soft   ware Rev D or lower  No measurements  for  example CO    2nd Press Temp  from the Meas     urement Extension are available  
139. ed values are converted to the user selected unit     Temperature Alarming    This component generates high low alarms if an alarm limit is exceeded  Additionally  a  technical alarm is generated if no temperature can be measured     Temperature User Controls  This component controls the user selected settings     e Set temperature alarm limits    Select the temperature measurement units    Introduction to the Instrument 43    Section 3   Measurement Server Extensions Description and Features    44    Section 3   Measurement Server Extensions Description  and Features    The Measurement Server Extensions  M3015A and M3016A  are flexible patient  measurement units which partner with the Measurement Server to form the base for a variety  of systems that enable easy customization to a hospital   s requirements  Extensions  as  convenient parts  expand on the important patient measurements provided by the  Measurement Server     Used with the Measurement Server  the Measurement Server Extension is designed to  Monitor patients in most critical and acute patient care areas of the hospital  For bedside use     the Server and Extension are most commonly seen mounted on a Monitor  The Server and an  Extension can also be mounted on a bed or a roller stand     M3015A Measurement Server Extension  The Measurement Server Extension for sidestream CO  measurement  M3015A  includes       Measurements of sidestream CO    and Press Temp   e Signal and alarm processing       M3015A    06 only
140. een Configuration    e Numerics and Wave Presentation     Key and TouchStrip Processing    e Alarm and Status Presentation     Alarm Manager Software Module    The visual and audible alarms generated by the Measurement Server  the Measurement  Server Extension or by the Monitor software modules are assigned priorities by the Alarm  Manager  The Alarm Manager also     e Monitors the    alarm suspended      alarm silence  and    alarm reminder  functionality     Manages alarm latching  alarms remain in effect until reset or turned off by the user      Triggers the Nurse Call Relay      Generates alarm event triggers for any user defined trigger conditions     Admit   Discharge   Transfer  ADT  Software Module    This module maintains the patient s demographics and controls the upload of trend data from  the Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension  It allows the user to       Admit a new patient     Transfer a patient to another Monitor     Discharge a patient     Trend Software Module    This module manages a trend database  It stores physiological values from the Measurement  Server and from the Measurement Server Extension in two separate databases  a short term  and a long term database  The contents of these databases is battery buffered  so that no data  is lost in the event of a power failure     Events Software Module    The events software module allows the user to take snapshots of the Monitor state and store  them for later viewing or printing This can
141. elay     See the specifications for the Nurse Call Relay in the Monitor and Measurement Server  Specifications chapter of the Instructions for Use  and the documentation for the device you  are connecting     Modification for Nurse Call Alarm Relays    Some customers may want to have an Open On Alarm relay instead of a Closed On Alarm  for their Nurse Call system  Qualified Philips service personnel can modify the connector  board  part number M3046 66522     The modification should be done only on request  in the field       factory supplied connector  boards or monitors have the original board including the Close On Alarm Relay     To make the Open On Alarm relay modification  complete the following steps     Installing the Instrument    Modification for Nurse Call Alarm Relays    Step 1 Cut the existing conductor path on the upper side of the connector board with a  sharp implement                                 P    e    Dt              1  Cut connector path       2  Remove Shavings    Step 2 Very carefully remove all copper or plastic shavings from the board   Step 3 Turn board over     Step 4 Build the new connection to the Open On Alarm contact  shown below     Using a piece of wire and solder  connect the three  3  points on the bottom of the  circuit board as illustrated in the following photographs     C  be  x    31 7       3  Turn board over       4  Build new connection    Installing the Instrument 77    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    NOTE    78    V
142. ely the Battery LED 15 defective  In this case    replace the Monitor Bezel    To check whether the System Board is defective  disconnect AC power and switch on the   Monitor  If the Monitor remains off  either the battery fuse  surface mounted  on the Con    nector Board is blown or the System Board is defective  If necessary  replace the Connector   Board      If the Monitor still remains off  the battery control circuit on the System Board is defective    Replace the System Board      Initial Instrument Boot Phase    The following steps are to ensure that the Monitor finishes its first boot phase and the  application software starts running  The application software is running when the yellow  LED blinks slowly  1 time per second      For these steps it is assumed that the Monitor is powered correctly and the 4 5 V System Board    supply voltage is okay  This is indicated by the On Off Standby LED and the green LED on  the Main Board  upper left  both on     Troubleshooting the Instrument 173    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    What Happens During a Regular Boot  AC powered  without Battery  The Monitor Bezel LEDs  tone and display come up as follows       The AC Power LED is on      When the On Off Standby switch is pressed  the On Off Standby LED switches on imme   diately      The Alarm LED and the Suspend LED both switch on red and the Battery LED switches on  yellow  After 1 second  the Alarm LED switches to yellow  after 1 second all three switch  off      At the
143. emoved  the backlight tubes  can be removed and replaced     Although you need to remove the chassis  you do not need to remove the System Board or the  Power Supply     To remove the LCD Assembly  do the following     Step 1  Step 2    Step 3    Remove the chassis as described previously in this chapter   Use a small screwdriver to remove the Display Assembly cable   Push the complete assembly  including the rubber cushion  the LCD display  and    the cables  out from the rear of the chassis  Start pushing from the top being careful  not to damage or bend the 6 clips around the cushion     Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly for the Monitor       Never touch the front of the display assembly  the screen   or the backlight tubes  with your  fingers  Doing so can reduce the lifetime of the parts     Step 4 Then push from the sides        Step 6 Unplug the backlight tube cables     Repairing the Instrument 227    Disassembly for the Monitor    Step 7 Press down the retaining lever to release the backlight tube        acklight Tube       ress Lever Down to Release    Step 8 Slide out the tube and repeat for the second tube     Removing the Connector Board   To remove the Connector Board  do the following    Step 1 Remove the chassis as described previously in this chapter    Step 2 Remove the Power Supply as described previously in this chapter    Step3 The Connector Board  VGA  is fixed with a screw and can no longer be taken out  by removing the Connector Board cover and p
144. emperature measurements for the same patient including a Delta Temp calculation  feature      Two invasive blood pressure measurements for the same patient     For more information  see the section    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp   Press  measurement  on page 37     46 Introduction to the Instrument    Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension Hardware    Hardware Block Diagram    Power Sync  to Measurement Server    36   60 Volt  SRL Connector  RxD TxD    FEL Addresses  MSL connector         Microstream CO  BOARD Carine  Gas Outlet  z2         PRESS  Pressure or     22 TEMP Temperature  S65 Transducer  205  2 3  o       Main Functional Areas      Microstream CO   Board   consisting of an 80C552 Controller  the memory system  Flash  ROM  RAM  PLA  etc    the Flow system  FilterLine recognition system  Inlet  solenoid  valve   Measurement Cell  Exciter  IR Source  Detectors and Temp Sensor  and an analog  section with ADC       DC DC Converter Board  connecting to the Floating Non floating isolation area on the  Front End Board  Consisting also of a multiplexer for Front End Link communication to    the Measurement Server       PRESS TEMP Front End Board   consisting of the PRESS TEMP Front End and the  Floating Non floating Isolation area  all feeding signals to the DC DC Board     Introduction to the Instrument 47    Sidestream        Measurement    48    Sidestream CO  Measurement    Description    The M3015A Measurement Server Exten
145. enotes a non fatal error     Device ID Code This number refers to a software module  and    Is used to indicate the location of a fault     n This number 1s the internal software module  number   This number describes the type of fault identi   fied     Date Time This indicates the date time the error occurred        198 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 3 Using Support Functions    List of Error Codes    If a code labelled Software Condition occurs once  it requires no action  If it occurs  repeatedly  pass the information on to your Philips representative for analysis  When  reporting an error code  always provide information on the monitor revision  the  number of instances the code appears in the status log  and any symptoms or problems  seen on the monitor     Table 1  Error Codes for Release A    Device Error    ID Code Information   Action required    Severity    M3046A Monitor     ON  omm  ome  wma em   ON pomme  mu  wma em   Ow  omm  omm  emat 0             ow  omm    smart 0                    ON   ate    oec        omm   mer  wma edm _   ow  omm   mas wma edm _    2 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7           17316 12000 Software Condition    oN 17316 12100 Software Condition  CH  16400 Software Condition    Anz         i       Troubleshooting the Instrument 199    Part 3 Using Support Functions    200    Table 1  Error Codes for Release A    Severity Information   Action required           ae   ooms  iaa ete sever _         we  ur Soa at wre    If a code labelled Software Co
146. ension  The Monitor displays the data in  numerics and waves on the screen     The Monitor is prepared with a number of software modules  which communicate with each  other as shown in the diagram below  The Monitor software communicates with the  Measurement Server and  where present  the Measurement Server Extension via a normal  local area network  LAN  link  Data from the Monitor can be output to a printer via an  infrared serial link or via the LAN connector to a central print server  The Monitor can  communicate with an Philips Information Center via the LAN Connector  wired network  or  via the Wireless LAN Assembly  wireless network  when the appropriate options are present     M3046 CPU System  Inter process    Communications    Communication  Manager    Trend  Module  IrDA Serial IrDA Serial  Communication Interface  Events             Recorder   lt    gt  Manager  ADT Module    Display       Controller    Display and    Support            Operator  Interface  Alarm Operating    HIF LEDs    Controller Battery    controller       Alarm  Relay  Loudspeaker    Each of these modules is described in the following sections     12 Introduction to the Instrument    Monitor Theory of Operation    Display and User Interface Software Module    The Display and User Interface Software displays measurement data and status information  on the color LCD display  and processes the operator inputs from the HIF Controller  The  interface consists of the following sub modules     e Scr
147. eory Or              i           34  Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement                 37                  AES 37  IVIG AS UTE MEN co                ibt cote dis di sts ences 37  Temp  Press                              Re    ura eaa  rd ai qi eau e d 37  ISOC Ke         Ed    donee cto ose tasto  gt    sod statera    fe                   38                xo trc nno qb Ra bi ens eod Cabos obs aed x eme      38  Temperature and Invasive Pressure Software          clle  39  Block Diagram of the Temp Press Software                                   40  Invasive Pressure 5ottware Module                e bes SERE e ee               4   Temperature Software Module                                              42  Section 3   Measurement Server Extensions Description and Features                  44  PC AUC            ok hed  tite yaad                ORE                          44  M3015A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation                        45  Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension Hardware        46  Hardware Block Diagram                                                  47  sidestream    05  Neasurenient  3 2 05 ses        at      i PEEL EN SEE 48           pUON                                                       48  IMeasure Hie DS                   48  Contents    srdestream CO Peaures       ean                      49    Block Diagram of the Sidestream CO                                            
148. er 60 seconds   The leakage test value should be less than 6 mmHg     Testing the Instrument 147    Preventive Maintenance Tests    NBP Linearity Test   Step 1 Reduce the manometer pressure to 150 mmHg    Step 2 Wait 10 seconds for the measurement to stabilize    Step3 After these 10 seconds  compare the manometer value with the displayed value   Step 4 Document the value displayed by the M3046A  x3     Step5 If the difference is greater than 3 mmHg  calibrate the Server  see steps 10 to 12 in  the Accuracy Test procedure      Valve Test  Step 1 Raise the pressure again to 280 mmHg   Step 2 Select    Close valves  Off      Step 3 Wait 5 seconds then document the value displayed  The value should be less than 10  mmHg     Step 4 Document the value displayed by      M3046A  x4      Test Expected test results What to record on the  Service record  Accuracy test     1   value displayed by M3046A  Difference  lt  3mmHg  Leakage test     2   leakage test value  x2  lt 6 mmHg    Linearity test   x3   value displayed by M3046A  Difference  lt  3mmHg    Valve Test x4   value  lt  10 mmHg PN P x1 x2 x3 x4  or  PN F x 1   2   3   4  where P   Pass and F   Fail    Sidestream CO  Performance Test       NOTE 1  Allow 5 seconds between individual service procedures in order to ensure stable  equipment conditions   2  When certain Monitor procedures are running  for example  AutoZero or purging   service  procedures are not possible and trying to start them will result in a message    Servic
149. er Extension Hardware    The Extension receives information signals  such as Temp Press and mainstream         from  the patient then transmits the data through the Server to the Monitor via the Server to   Monitor link bar  See the    Functional Description of the Measurement Server Hardware    on  page 22 for a description of the normal processing of measurement data     The mainstream CO  Extension is always used with a Server  To function correctly  both the  Server and the Extension must have compatible software revisions     WARNING Never use a Measurement Extension with a Measurement Server which contains  Release A software  A XX XX   Since the software required to process data from the  Extension is absent  the additional measurements will not be displayed   To view the software revision  press the Setup Key and select Revisions     Pairing the Server with the Extension allows for the following       Measurement of both temperature and invasive blood pressure for the same patient      Two temperature measurements for the same patient including a Delta Temp calculation  feature      Two invasive blood pressure measurements for the same patient     For more information  see the section    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp   Press  measurement  on page 37     54 Introduction to the Instrument    Functional Description of the   3016   Measurement Server Extension Hardware    Hardware Block Diagram    36   60 Volt   Power Sync SRL Connector  RxD TxD to Measure
150. erature  TEMP  and or a second invasive pressure  PRESS     may be measured     An M3015A M3016A Measurement Server Extension must be used with a M3000A   M3001A Measurement Server  The Extension does not function alone     Attach the Measurement Server to the Measurement Server Extension by sliding it into the  grooves on the Measurement Server Extension and clicking it into place     Attach the combination of Measurement Server Extension and Measurement Server to the    Monitor exactly as described above for the Measurement Server  by sliding the Extension  into the grooves on the Monitor and clicking it into place     Attaching the Monitor to a Mount    Step 1 Make sure the front of the Monitor is facing the front of the mount  The front of the  mount has a blue button in the center     Step2 Lower the Monitor onto the mount until the feet of the Monitor click into the mount     Detaching the Monitor from a Mount    Step 1 Press and hold in the button  indicated by the arrow  on the front of the mounting      Step2 Lift the Monitor away from the mount        Step    Release the button     Installing the Instrument    Attaching the Measurement Server to a Mount    Attaching the Measurement Server to a Mount    Step 1          sure the Measurement Server is oriented correctly relative to the mount  see  the picture below      Step 2 Place the Measurement Server on the back mount   If it is not tight against the mount  slip it in the direction of the measurement    connectors
151. erification Procedure   Perform the following tests    Step 1 Power on test  see page 142    Step 2 Nursecall Performance test  see page 157    Step 3 Safety test  see page 159    You must document the modification for a particular unit  including the verification tests  in    the CSO  You must add a printed  dated and signed installation note to the Service  documentation of the modified Monitor     For convenience  we suggest that you attach a label to the instrument next to the output and   using permanent black or blue ink  add localized text similar to        Nurse Call is Open On Alarm Relay    or    Nurse Call is open        Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    See the IntelliVue Clinical Network Service Manual     Please also consult the configuration section of the monitor   s Instructions for Use for  information on assigning a label to the monitor     Configuring the Radio Frequency of the M3 M4 Monitor   The configuration tool for this procedure is contained on the IntelliVue Information Center  Application Software CD ROM that corresponds to your revision of the monitor and  Information Center  and must be copied to the PC used for the configuration procedure   The configuring PC must meet the following requirements      Microsoft Operating System software  Windows 98 or Windows NT        200 MHz or higher clock speed     RS 232 serial interface port  9 Pin D type connector      contain    CD ROM drive   M3 M4 monitors        have two IP Addresses  one for 
152. es dangerous to life are present in the Instrument when it is  connected to the mains Power Supply  Do not perform any disassembly procedures other  than Server and Extension removal with power applied to the Instrument  Failure to adhere  to this warning could cause serious injury or death      Residual High Voltage   There may be hazardous voltages stored in capacitors on the  Power Supply board even when the Instrument is not connected to the mains Power Supply   High voltages are present on the Power Supply board for up to 20 seconds after  disconnecting the mains power cord so always disconnect the Power Supply cord and wait    at least 20 seconds before removing or refitting the Power Supply board       Battery Warning   Never insert a battery without the Power Supply board being present   You may blow the battery fuse on the Connector Board       Power Cord Warning    Do not connect a mains power cord to a Power Supply that has  been removed from the Monitor     General Reassembly Refitting Comments      Battery Door    When inserting the Monitor chassis  always open the battery compartment  door to avoid striking the door clip       Ribbon Connections   Make sure male female ribbon connections are correctly lined up     e Open Component    Do not allow anything to fall into the open component     220 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly for the Monitor    Disassembly for the Monitor    Removing the Battery  To remove the battery  do the following     Step 1 Slide t
153. est has  passed over the whole screen once  If the test fails  repeat the test to make sure that it is not a  single  sporadic  fault  If it fails again  exchange the System Board     The advantage of this test compared to the SGRAM video memory test executed in the  coldstart test 1s that the patient database is not erased and the active default set is not reset to  user defaults     Backlight Test    The cumulative time the backlight has been operating is shown  When replacing backlight  tubes  this counter must be reset     reset of the backlight time must be confirmed     If the backlight tubes have been on for an estimated time of typically 25 000 hours   brightness might be reduced by about half and the tubes should be replaced  Since the  reduction of effective brightness depends on a number of factors  the decision to replace the  tubes should be determined on a case by case basis rather than the total number of operating  hours  Examples of factors that contribute to reduced backlight brightness are as follows       Cumulative operating hours     Operating interval time or user set brightness level     Troubleshooting the Instrument 207    Using Service Mode    NOTE    208    Reset PumpOpTime    The cumulative time the pump in the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  sidestream  CO   has been operating is shown  When replacing the pump  applies to units with serial  number prefix DEO20xxxxx only   this counter must be reset  A reset of the pump time must  be confirme
154. est is required once per day and when the Instrument is repaired or when  Instrument parts are replaced    This mainstream CO  performance test is a User task and is described in the  nstructions for    Use  There is no requirement for additional tests to be performed by the Service Engineer or  Biomedical Engineer     Nurse Call Relay Performance Test   This test checks the operation of the Nurse Call Relay  The Nurse Call Relay test is  recommended for customer sites where the nurse call is in use  It should be performed once  every two years and when the Instrument is repaired or when Instrument parts are replaced     The Nurse Call relay functions as follows         Standard Operation    Relay open     Alarm Condition   Relay closed     Tools required  Ohmmeter   Step 1 Plug a phono connector into the Nurse Call Relay connector   Step 2 Connect the ohmmeter   Step 3 If no alarm occurs  the relay contacts are open   NOTE When an alarm occurs  the relay contacts close   NOTE The conditions described above are the unmodified conditions  Please check accordingly if    the Nurse Call Alarm relays have been modified  see    Modification for Nurse Call Alarm  Relays  on page 76      Testing the Instrument 157    Accuracy and Performance Procedures    158    ECG Sync Performance Test   This test checks the performance of ECG synchronization between the Monitor and a  defibrillator  The ECG sync performance test is required once every two years and when the  Instrument is repaired
155. ety Checks    S 1  Part 1  System Enclosure Leakage Current   NC  normal condition     L        S1 o    O O O      0      9  N  L  innu    Expected test results     Medical electrical system    Instrument under test    Signal parts      Signal parts  in  and or         in  and or  output    Other  Instrument           Not present in Class 2        Can be multiple different connections to different equipment at same time     Normal condition maximum leakage current x1                   Measures leakage current of exposed metal parts of Instrument under Test  IUT  and between  parts of the system within the patient environment  normal and reversed polarity using 52     Safety test according IEC 60601 1   UL2601 1    S 1  Part 2  System Enclosure Leakage current   Single Fault  open earth        160    Medical electrical system    Instrument under test Signal parte        Signal parts  in  and or      in  and or  output    Other  Instrument         Can be multiple different connections to different equipment at same time     Testing the Instrument    Patient Safety Checks    Expected test results     Single Fault maximum leakage current x2  lt  500UA  IEC 60601 1    lt  300uA  UL2601 1     Measures leakage current of exposed metal parts of Instrument under Test         with    Protective Earth  PE  open circuit  S4   open  and between parts of the system within the  patient environment  normal and reversed polarity using S2     Reporting safety test S 1  in the Service record  S
156. ew Power Supply can be used with all new parts except the old  Main System Board  If an old Power Supply is replaced or exchanged for a new Power  Supply  the new Main System Board is also required  A new Power Supply cannot be used    with an old Main Board     Old Chassis and Housing   An old version Chassis and Housing can be used with all new  parts except the new Connector Board  VGA  and cover     New Chassis and Housing   A new Chassis and Housing can be used with all new parts  Old Monitor Bezel   An old version Monitor Bezel can be used with all new parts     New Monitor Bezel   A new Monitor Bezel can be used with all old parts     Replacement Parts    List of Replacement and Exchange Parts    List of Replacement and Exchange Parts    The Part Numbers in the list of parts  below  are used to order parts from your Philips  representative  The Item numbers  where applicable  correspond to the illustration which    follows     Exchange parts are parts that have been returned to Philips and reconditioned for further use   Parts offered as exchange parts are in excellent service order according to rigorous Philips  standards but offer a considerable price advantage to the user     Replacement Parts 247    Monitor Parts    Monitor Parts    Bezel Parts    12 Digit  Part Number    Reordering Description  Number       IrDA Interface       M3046 62231 453563332911 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  English    M3046 62232 453563332921 Monitor Bezel  IrDA Interface  French    M3046
157. falling or being  pulled out of the wall channel  Do not remove this stop while the mount ts supporting an  Instrument     Do not mount any portion of a monitoring instrument over a patient   s bed     Do not exceed the maximum rated load specified for each wall mount     Ensure that no electrical wiring  utilities  or piping interfere with the selected wall mount   ing location     Do not install wall channel onto solid brick or brick veneer walls  Do not attempt to install  wall mounts onto crumbly wall material     Check the mounting hardware holding the wall channel or bracket to the wall every 12  months  Tighten if necessary     100 Installing the Instrument    Installing the Wall         M3080A  A13     Installing the Wall Rail  M3080A  A13     The wall rail is intended for use with the Universal Bed Hanger   A11   To mount the rail  securely  you need 3 screws  These are not provided because the type of surface dictates the  type of screw used     Step 1  Step 2  Step 3  Step 4    Step 5             x      Sony   aS IAPS       U      Ud Bue es        e                    An          2 ya P r       H    ARE EM n          E                   32 oa Dm      LA Ue M oye Rrra ssi Sty         A                                E T          CN          KN  TAN       Unpack the Wall Rail and check all parts are available    Select 3 screws  appropriate to surface material     Insert the 3 screws through the screw holes provided in the plate   Tighten the screws     Hang the bed 
158. ference to help identify problems early if test results deteriorate  over time     b  Discard them     c  File them but do not consult them in case of problems     Question 3  Which is the one parameter that requires daily calibration testing         SpO   performance   b  Temperature performance     c  Mainstream CO  performance     163    Answers to the Tutorial for Testing the Instrument    Answers to the Tutorial for Testing the Instrument    1  d   See page 137 for more details    2  a   See entire chapter for more details      3  c   See page 157 for more details      164 Testing the Instrument    5 Troubleshooting the Instrument       Objectives    In order to meet this chapter   s objectives  you should be able to diagnose and isolate  hardware failures to the level of the    field replaceable part      In addition  this chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems using error codes and other  support functions including       How to use the Status Log to check for error codes  and other service information     How to interpret error codes and how to use them to isolate faults     Use this chapter when you suspect you have a problem with your Monitor  your  Measurement Server or your Measurement Server Extension  or whenever you are referred to  this chapter from another part of the Service Guide    This chapter is divided as follows    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists   This part provides check for the obvious hints and tips   Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrume
159. from  the ECG  and for the respiration rate  RR      You can use either standard or EASI lead placements with the M3046A Release E together  with the M3001A  Using a standard 5 electrode set in EASI lead placement you can monitor  three out of 12 standard ECG leads simultaneously and continuously at the bedside  EASI   derived 12 lead ECGs and their measurements are approximations to conventional 12 lead  ECGs  As the 12 lead ECG derived with EASI is not exactly identical to the 12 lead  conventional ECG obtained from an electrocardiograph  it should not be used for diagnostic  interpretations     Respiratory monitoring is also possible with the EASI placement  respiration is measured  between the I and A electrodes     Introduction to the Instrument 23    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    ECG Resp Features    This illustration shows the user controls and connectors for the ECG Resp        This standard 12 pin  connector will accept  either a 3 lead or a 5 lead  ECG cable     Features of the ECG Resp measurements are described in the following paragraphs     ECG Modes  The QRS complexes are detected automatically     In non paced mode  no pace pulses are expected and no pace pulse rejection occurs  In paced  mode  pace pulses of channel   and 2 are annotated with a small dash on the screen     Resp Modes    In auto mode  the Monitor measures respiration and adjusts the detection level automatically   In manual mode  the user sets the detection level for 
160. ftware and compares it against the limits set by the user    This software also gets INOP messages from the SpO  algorithm software    Alarms are communicated to the Monitor via the operating software     The SpO  Controller software receives the red and infrared signals  the transducer coding  information  the INOP and error messages and the status information from the SpO  CPU   It receives the operating controls and the user settings from the Monitor  The user settings   are stored in non volatile memory     Introduction to the Instrument    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press   measurement  Description    The Measurement Server has a measurement channel which can measure invasive pressure  or temperature     Measurements  The measurement produces a numeric for temperature  or a real time pressure wave  together    with the pulse rate and numeric readings for the systolic  diastolic  and mean blood pressure  values     Temp Press Features    This illustration shows the user controls and connector for the Temp Press         Connectors for use with a    Temp or a Press  transducer     Press Wave  Blood pressure is depicted as a pressure wave with the numerics for systolic  diastolic  and  mean pressure values  The blood pressure shows the cycles of contraction and release within    the heart and the resultant pressure that is generated to move the blood through the vessels     This illustrati
161. ge     An AutoZero is in  progress  An AutoZero  will be done at the fol   lowing intervals  5 min   utes after connecting  the FilterLine  1 hour  later  12 hours later  and  every 12 hours from  there on     Attach a FilterLine   Remember that only  Microstream accesso     ries may be used with  the M3015A     1  and 2 Check the Fil   terLine and exhaust  tube  then disconnect  and reconnect the Fil   terLine  If the INOP 15  still displayed  use     new FilterLine     3  If Pump Op Time has  been reset  perform a  flow check and store the  flow 1n Service Mode   select    Store Flow          181    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems                CO  PURGING    NO CENTRAL  MONITORING    182    Check for an occlusion  and remove    If necessary  replace the  FilterLine     The Measurement  Extension 1  purging the  FilterLine  This occurs  when an occlusion 15  detected in the line or  airway adapter  If the  occlusion 15 not  removed by purging   the Measurement  Extension will go into  Standby Mode and a     CO  OCCLUSION       INOP will be displayed     With a wireless net   work  Check that the  Monitor has not been  moved out of range of  an access point and that  no microwave oven or  other non monitoring  wireless device 1s inter   fering with the Monitor     Central monitoring has  been interrupted     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Isolating the Defective Component    You can use the following ta
162. ger  M3080A     11                               99  Warnings  Cautions  and Safety Precautions Relating to Wall Mount Installation        100  Installing the Wall Rail  M3080A    13                                        101  Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A     14                                 101   screwed Directly      Wall       eet holla                  102   Mounted to the GCX Wall Channel  M3080A     15                            103   Attached to a Universal  Pole Clamp is aeuo qtd CR PAGO OPE PECUNIAS 104   Attached to the Monitor 0 0         ccc ccc eee eee eee          een             105  Installing the GCX Wall Channel  M3080A     15                               4 106  Installing the Universal Pole Clamp  M3080A    05                               107  Installing the Measurement Server Mounting Options                              108   Server Mounting Plate  M3080A    01                                      108   Server Mounting Plate  M3080A  A02                                      111  Mounting Options for the Local                                                        111                Termina on v s eraot ee                     HR 112  Disposing of the Monitor  Measurement Server and Measurement Server Extensions     115  Tutorial for Installing the Instrument                                           116  Answers to the Tutorial for Installing the                                               117   3 Maintaining the Instrument              c
163. ger monitors  the remaining battery capacity and indicates the status of the battery  Refer to the  documentation that accompanies the charger for details on charger use     You can leave batteries in the Battery Charger and Conditioner    8043     as no trickle  charging takes place     Conditioning a Battery Using the Monitor    If you do not have access to a Battery Charger and Conditioner  M8043A   you can condition  the batteries using the monitor     We recommend two full charge and discharge cycles to ensure proper conditioning   independent of the initial condition of the battery     If you need to continue battery powered monitoring  replace the battery in the monitor with a  different charged and conditioned battery  Do not condition a battery in a monitor that is  being used on patients     1 Insert the battery that is to be conditioned into a monitor that is not currently being used     2 Disconnect the monitor from the AC power supply     Maintaining the Instrument 131    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices    NOTE    132    3 Turn on the monitor  and leave it on until it switches off automatically    4 Turn the monitor off using the On Off Standby switch    5 Reconnect the monitor to the AC power supply    6 Charge the battery until it is full  the battery LED on the monitor is green      7 Repeat steps 2 to 6     A Note on Trickle Charging    Trickle charging means a low current is applied to a fully charged battery to keep the charge  at 100    Th
164. gmomanometers  ANSI AAMI SP   10 1992  in relation to mean error and  standard deviation  when compared to  intra arterial measurements in a  representative patient population     Installing the Instrument    Configuring the Monitor                      Rel  C 2                Rel      27   Intra arterial    E  I                 c    150    Intra arterial Pressure  mmHg        Figure 1 Systolic readings of NBP Measurement Characteristics for M3 Release B  and M3 Release C compared to readings obtained using the manual auscultatory    method  Korotkoff  and direct arterial measurement                       Rel  C 2                Rel             Intra arterial    DUT  mmHg     100 150    Intra arterial Pressure  mmHg        Figure 2 Diastolic readings of NBP Measurement Characteristics for M3 Release B  and M3 Release C compared to readings obtained using the manual auscultatory    method  Korotkoff  and direct arterial measurement     The data for Figure 1 and Figure 2 was derived from      Clinical Evaluations and   Auscultatory Measurement of Arterial Pressure During Anesthesia  a Reassessment of  Korotkoff Sounds   E  Pereira et al   European Journal of Anesthesiology 1985  2     20     The setting of NBP Measurement Characteristic is stored in the Measurement Server  If the  Measurement server is moved between monitors the setting will travel with the Measurement    Server     Installing the Instrument 89    Installing an Additional Display    WARNING    90    Installing 
165. guage 12 Digit Reordering Number    Standard Version    and Option  C12  Conventinal 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue only      English M3001 64101 453563462481       French 453563462491   453563462501  Dutch 453563462511   453563462521  Italian 453563462381  Norwegian 453563462391  453563462401  Finnish 453563462411  apanese 453563462481  Danish 453563462421  Traditional Chinese 453563462481  Simplified Chinese 453563462481  Portuguese 453563462431  453563462441  453563462481   453563462451  Hungarian 453563462481   453563462461  Polish 453563462471  453563462481    Korean M3001 64101 453563462481    Cn     Cn Cn      N s D       lt     a       5     e O       0 Q    3           7    A n D   gt   gt   gt  5          54 Replacement Parts    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Option  C06  Pressure Temp Extension   and Option  C18  Pressure Temp Extension  Conventional 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue only                                          versions of the M3001A Measurement Server offer EASI lead placement using an EASI 5 electrode  cable set  The conventional 12 lead ECG capability of M3001A  C12 and  C18 works only with the  IntelliVue family of monitors  You can connect a 10 electrode lead set  for example  if a patient is  transferred from an IntelliVue family monitor   but only the standard five electrodes  RA  LA  RL  LL   and V  are used for monitoring  The rest are automatically ignored        Replacement Parts 255    Multi Measurement Server Parts    M3001A MMS Part Number
166. guration of this Wireless Adapter 15 now complete   Step 17 Remove the phono plug from the rear of the Wireless Adapter and replace the cover   Step 18 If there are additional Wireless M3 M4 Monitors to be configured  repeat Step 1   through Step 12 for each monitor     The Configuration Tool retains the parameter values entered when it was previously run     For each Wireless Adapter configured  enter the parameters for that Wireless Adapter in the  Wireless Bedside Parameters window     It is possible that all of the Wireless M3 M4 Monitors in a system will have the same  configuration parameters     When all Wireless M3 M4 Monitors have been configured     Step 19 Click Close in the upper right corner of the Configuration Tool window     Troubleshooting    If an error should occur during the configuration process  one of the following  troubleshooting procedures may resolve the problem     Installing the Instrument 85    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    If the Read only attribute has not been removed from the configuration tool files  the  following error message will be displayed     Wireless Tool      fi Error opening configuration file  D tools  Wyireless T ool ContigFiles4P1_ 465  cfg  For writing   Error  Access to D staalsswrelessT ool onfigFilezP1 465       was denied   5        The Configuration File i not updated with last user entered parameters          Click OK to exit the tool and remove the Read only attribute following the procedure  described in M
167. h of the four electrodes  They are then  passed to a digital to analog converter  D A Converter  for offset compensation and then to  an analog to digital converter  A D Converter   The input output logic  which is controlled    Introduction to the Instrument 25    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    26    from the CPU  controls the analog to digital conversion and reads out the digitized ECG  data  The CPU communicates with the ECG ASIC via a built in serial link     To prevent interference from the 50 60Hz power line  the common mode signal is used to    drive the right leg  RL  drive amplifier  The output from the amplifier is then returned to the  patient via the RL electrode     Excitation Current Source  The excitation current source feeds a small current into the right arm and left leg electrodes     This results in a voltage drop between the right arm and left leg which 15 proportional to the  thorax impedance     Bridge  amp  Amplifier    The bridge subtracts an offset from the voltage between right arm and left leg  The amplifier  amplifies the remaining signal     The Central Processing Unit  CPU        ECG ASIC Pace Pulse  Controller pue         Data Gan Processing System CPU    System  Acquisition  amp  Filtering Communication            The CPU performs the following functions                                     Controls the ECG ASIC  and stores ASIC specific calibration and error log data  This  initializes the intended ASIC configurations s
168. hanger over the wall rail     Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A  A14     The Tilt Swivel mount can be used in the following situations       Screwed directly to a wall       Mounted to the GCX Wall Channel  A15  described in the following section      e Attached to the Universal Pole Clamp       Attached directly to the Monitor     Installing the Instrument    101    Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A  A14     102    Screwed Directly to a Wall    This option is used to mount the Monitor on a wall but to also provide tilt and swivel  capability  To mount the assembly securely  you need 3 screws  These are not provided  because the type of surface dictates the type of screw used     Adapter  Plate             w             X   lt       lt        9   2                 2      Step 1 Unpack the Tilt Swivel mount and check all parts are available    Step 2 Remove the adapter plate  this is only necessary for the GCX Wall Channel    Step 3 Secure the rail to the Tilt Swivel mount with the 2 screws provided    Step 4 Select 3 screws  appropriate to surface material     Step 5 Insert the 3 screws through the screw holes provided in the plate    Step 6 Tighten the screws to secure the mount to the wall     Step 7 Use adjustment knobs to adjust to the required tilt swivel angle     Hang the bed hanger over the rail     Installing the Instrument    Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A  A14     Mounted to the GCX Wall Channel  M3080A  A15     This option is used to mount 
169. has been operated is shown  but cannot be  modified     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Using Service Mode    NBP Cycles   information only     The cumulative number of NBP cycles completed is shown  but cannot be modified     Line Frequency    When operating on mains power supply  the line frequency indication 1  used to switch  between 50 Hz and 60 Hz for the ECG filtering frequency     CAUTION Make sure that the Line Frequency is set correctly for the country option ordered  The factory  default is 60 Hz for all units regardless of country option     How To Access the Monitor and Server Revision Screen  1 Press Setup   2 Move the highlight to Revision     3 Depending on which screen you want to display  toggle between Monitor Revision and  MeasServ Revision     Troubleshooting the Instrument 209    Troubleshooting the Installed Instrument    Troubleshooting the Installed Instrument    Here 15 a list of some easily corrected troubleshooting cases  If the fault is not described  below  investigate further without delay  For more information  see  Testing the Instrument   and  Repairing the Instrument        Troubleshooting with Self Test Alarm Messages   When You Switch the Monitor On     Message What To Do  Battery Low  approxi  Connect to AC power to charge the battery  or fit a  mately 20 minutes remain    fully charged battery within next 15 minutes   ing   Check Status Log This indicates a non critical problem in the  Monitor  There is a defect but the Monitor can sti
170. he  Measurement Server that acquires those measurements  and the monitoring system that  displays them     Who Should Use this Book    If you are a biomedical engineer or a technician responsible for troubleshooting  repairing   and maintaining Philips   s patient monitoring systems  this book is designed for you  If you  are new to Philips   s product line or monitoring systems  you may find this book helpful as an  orientation to the equipment  If you have already worked on the systems and now want  further details on how they work  you are likely to find much of the information you need  here     Conventions Used in this Book    A warning alerts you to a potential serious outcome  adverse event or safety hazard   Failure to observe a warning may result in death or serious injury to the user or patient     A caution alerts you to circumstances where special care is necessary for the safe and  effective use of the product  Failure to observe a caution may result in minor or moderate  personal injury  damage to the product or other property  and possibly in a remote risk of  more serious injury     vi    Contents    1 Introduction to the     5             amp                                 1               Te                                           1  CONCE Dis uos Sene ohare eas ERE A ERE MEE SN Ee             REM e a REIN QE 1  Introducing the Instrument Components                                           2  Instr  ment Components             oae Seb enano e How eee DER 
171. he Instructions for Use  as  well as the setup sections for each of the measurements for more information on Monitor  setup     There is a second level of configuration for the Monitor which is only available after entering  a password  See the Installation chapter and Configuration chapter of the User s Guide for  more information     Selecting NBP Measurement Characteristic  Only software revisions D and later allow the NBP Measurement Characteristic to be    changed     WARNING Consult technical support before changing the NBP measurement characteristic in  Adult or Pediatric mode  Changing the NBP measurement characteristic will  significantly change the NBP readings  especially in the elevated pressure range    The setting of NBP Measurement Characteristic is not transferred as part of a cloning  operation with the cloning tool  It has to be set on each monitor separately     NOTE This setting changes the NBP measurement characteristic in adult and pediatric mode  It has  no influence to the NBP measurement characteristic in neonatal mode  In neonatal mode  always the intraarterial method is used as reference standard to validate the overall accuracy     For the M3046A Monitor with software revision E     Step1 Highlight the NBP numeric and press on the TouchStrip   OR   Step 1 Press hte Setup key    Step 2 Move the highlight to    NBP        Step 3 Press on the TouchStrip    When you are finished with the NBP Setup  press the Main Screen key      Installing the Instrume
172. he Max Error  see diagram  below      When the Max Error is greater than 20   a message is displayed prompting the user to  condition the battery  as described in    Conditioning a Battery Using the Monitor  on  page 131     Never use a monitor that is monitoring a patient to perform battery conditioning     You can reset the value for the Max Error before the battery needs conditioning  by  discharging the battery completely and then recharging it in a monitor that is plugged in but  turned off  A conditioning message may also appear if the battery has been stored in a  monitor that has not been in use for several weeks  Refer to  Conditioning a Battery  on  page 130     Maintaining the Instrument    Battery Handling  Maintenance and Good Practices                                                                                 100   Charge    Trickle Charging         es se a      des gest  Discharging             S   C   o  iT M                g Charging   B    2         gt     amp     o               Max Error       Ea em      Charge    time                Conditioning a Battery Using the Battery Charger and Conditioner  M8043A     We recommend you use the Battery Charger and Conditioner  M8043A  for all your battery  maintenance needs  The M8043A analyses the battery status  and then charges and or  conditions the battery automatically as required  with no input from the user necessary  You  can also start a conditioning cycle manually  After a conditioning cycle  the char
173. he System CPU via a serial interface  The CPU  receives calibration data and user settings from the System CPU     Temperature and Invasive Pressure Software  The CPU contains software that performs       communication with the System CPU     data acquisition of the invasive pressure signal or temperature     control of the A D converter     pressure wave and temperature numeric filtering     switching between temperature and pressure measurement depending on the connected  transducer      NOP and error detection and self tests    The CPU receives control information from the System CPU and transmits the pressure wave  or a temperature numeric  INOPs and error and status messages to the System CPU     The CPU software functionality is structured into the following modules  see block diagram      Introduction to the Instrument 39    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    e System CPU communication     ADC controller and data acquisition     Wave numeric processing and filtering    Pressure temperature mode detection    Block Diagram of the Temp Press Software                            2     iz       ZL Pressure   Temperature     un  m       Mode Detector      Sus 2          E ES   29 2s               5 52              sas     2    E                 gt  s system           i  amp   lt r CPU       oS      Data Acquisition      Communication   e RO          System CPU Communication    The pressure temperature measurement section of the CPU contains a 
174. he battery compartment door toward the rear of the Monitor  and open it  down     Step 2 Locate the battery extractor tape and pull it to disengage the battery socket     Step 3 Pull the battery out     Removing the Power Supply   Read the warnings at the beginning of this chapter   You must remove the Power Supply to access the fuse   To remove the Power Supply  do the following     Step 1 Remove the Measurement Server and  where present  the Measurement Server  Extension     Step 2 Remove the battery   Step 3 Switch on the Instrument and disconnect the AC power cord from both the  Instrument and the mains power source  after 20 seconds  the capacitors on the    Power Supply board are drained      Step 4 Push a thin bladed screwdriver into the hole next to the cover     LU ab       Step 5 Release the cover     Step 6 Remove the two anti vibration screws   These are the only anti vibration screws and  must be refitted  Do not lose these screws      Repairing the Instrument 221    Disassembly for the Monitor    Step 7 Slide out the Power Supply        Removing the Chassis   Read the warnings at the beginning of this chapter    To remove the chassis  do the following    Step 1 Remove the Server    Step 2 Remove the battery    Step3 Switch the Instrument on and disconnect the AC power cord from the Instrument  and the mains power source  after 20 seconds  the capacitors on the Power Supply    board are drained      Step 4 Push a thin bladed screwdriver into the hole next to the 
175. he chassis as described previously in this chapter     224 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly for the Monitor    Step    Remove the screw which secures the connector board  then pull out the Connector  Board     4       Step 5 Lay the chassis face down on a clean  scratch free surface     Step 6 Disconnect the loudspeaker cable  1    For Monitors with Wireless LAN assembly  Disconnect the ventilator wires  2   from the system board  Unclip the fan assembly from the metal sheet  3  and pull  forwards to remove        Step 7 Remove the 4 System Board screws  4      Repairing the Instrument 225    Disassembly for the Monitor    226    Step 8    Withdraw the board from the chassis towards and slightly to the right of you to  avoid hitting the chassis        Removing the Wireless Assembly  for Monitors with Wireless  LAN Interface only     Step 1  Step 2  Step 3    Step 4    Step 5    Remove the Server as described previously    this chapter   Remove the battery as described previously in this chapter   Remove the chassis as described previously in this chapter     Remove the system board  complete with the wireless LAN assembly  as described  previously in this chapter     Lift the wireless assembly up to release the connector  then remove the assembly  from the system board     Removing the LCD Assembly and Backlight Tubes    This procedure describes how to remove the LCD Assembly which includes the LCD screen  and rubber anti vibration cushion  Once the assembly has been r
176. he configuration tool is used again     Step 3 Place the cursor over either of the highlighted fields and right click the mouse to  display a menu listing Properties  as shown below        WEB wwirelessM3 1 2b15 C    Open With     Scan with Marten Antivirus  Quick View Plus  Quick Print  Add to zip  Add to WB wirelessM3 1 2b15 zip  zip and E Mail  wB wirelessM3 1 2b15 zip    Send      d    Cut  Copy  Create Shortcut    Delete  Rename    Properties       80 Installing the Instrument                Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    Step 4 Click on Properties to display the selected file   s Properties window         WB WielessM3_1 2615 CFG Properties    General                    wB wireless 3 1 2b15  CF  Type  CFG File   Location   A Stoole    ConfigT ool   Size  3  TBKB  3 243 bytes     MS DOS name WE                     Created  Wednesday  March 14  2001 1 59 00       Modified  Wednesday  March 14  2001 2 25 04       Accessed  Thursday  March 15  2001  Attributes                     Hidden       Archive    Sustem                             Click in the Attributes  box preceding Read only to remove the check  This removes  Read only from the selected file     If the configuration tool is run with this file set as Read only  the following error message    will be displayed  Clicking OK will exit the tool and the Read only attribute must be  removed to clear this condition     Wireless T ool              Error opening configuration file  D  tools  Wireless T aol C anf
177. he settings  such as alarm limits  are stored inside the server  This  behaviour permits fast and easy transport     Alarms Reset    The Silence Reset key on the Measurement Server allows you to silence alarm tones  while  retaining visual alarm messages  depending on your Monitor   s configuration      Server to Monitor Link Bar    A single connector  sometimes referred to as the Server to Monitor connector or link bar   allows quick and easy connection to a Monitor  This allows the Monitor to show waves and  alarms from the Measurement Server     The interface subsystem consists of the physical interface to the Monitor or the Measurement  Server Extension and controlling software     Digitized patient information transmitted over the link bar may be waves  for ECG  pressure   respiration  pleth   numeric information  for heart rate pulse  pressure values  SpO  and  respiration rate   or alert information  for alarms and assorted status information      For Service Procedures there is a special Service Link Bar  which is used in place of the  standard Link Bar     Measurement Server Theory of Operation    The Measurement Server is prepared with software divided into four major conceptual layers   The Measurement Server software communicates with the Monitor via a normal local area  network  LAN  link  The four conceptual layers of the Server software are divided as  follows       The First Layer   tThis consists of the operating system which passes messages between  the vari
178. hout Pressure and  Temperature  German   M3015 441 64 453563402611   M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Dutch   M3015 44165 453563402621   M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Spanish       N    66 Replacement Parts    M3015A Measurement Server Extension Parts    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number  M3015 44166 453563402631 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Italian  M3015 44167 453563402641 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Norwegian  M3015 44168 453563402651 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Swedish  M3015 44169 453563402661 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Finnish    M3015 44170 453563402671 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature   Japanese   M3015 44174 453563402681 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature   Portuguese   M3015 44175 453563402691 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Greek   M3015 44177 453563402701 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Russian   M3015 44180 453563402711 M3015A Front Bezel without Pressure and  Temperature  Polish   M3015 29303 453563332261 M3015A Pump Kit  including        scrubber    Can only be exchanged in units with serial number prefix  DEO20xxxxx     M3015 29314 453563332281   CO  Infrared Lamp  Can only be exchanged in units with    serial number prefix DEO20xxxxx manufactured before June  2002     5041 8114 453563100081   Mounting Pin for M301
179. ial Recorder Interface  Italian    M3046 62337 453563485001 Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Norwegian    N    48 Replacement Parts    Part Number    M3046 62338  M3046 62339  M3046 62340  M3046 62341  M3046 62342  M3046 62343  M3046 62344  M3046 62345  M3046 62347  M3046 62349  M3046 62350    Replacement Parts    12 Digit  Reordering  Number    453563485011  453563485021  453563485031  453563485041  453563485051  453563485061  453563485071  453563485081  453563485091  453563485101  453563485111       Monitor Parts    Description    Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Swedish   Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Finnish   Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Japanese   Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Danish   Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Traditional Chinese    Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Simplified Chinese    Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Portuguese    Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Greek  Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Russian  Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Czech    Monitor Bezel  Serial Recorder Interface  Polish    249    Monitor Parts    Other Monitor Parts    12 Digit    Part Number Reordering Description    Number    453563333141 Monitor System Board  English software preloaded  Rev  A      453563332681 Monitor Power Supply assembly  old   453563332691 Monitor Power Supply assembly  new        M3046 66502    M3046 60001  M3046 60002    2110 0495 N A Fuse  mounte
180. icroamps  uA  rms at 264V  50 60 Hz    Installation    Do not touch the patient when connecting or disconnecting the cable to the Video Out  connector     When an additional display is connected  and an additional protective earth connection is  needed to be made to the Monitor  this protective earth connection may only be used if the  leakage current does not exceed the limits of IEC 60601 1 in normal condition     A Video Out connector is provided on the rear of the Monitor for connection to an additional  display  as shown below     LAN   Software Update  Connector     5V     Video out  Connector  for an additional    Nurse Call Relay  Connector    36V        Screw  connector  for protective    Installing the Instrument    Installing the 12V Adapter    Installing the 12V Adapter    The 12V adapter  option number M3080A  C32  is used with a vehicle 12V supply to power  an M3 M4 Monitor  The Adapter must be connected to ground or to the vehicle chassis   Detailed instructions can be found in the Instruction sheet delivered with the Adapter   M3080 9011A   After installation  a safety test must be performed as described in Chapter 4      Testing and Inspecting        Using the Battery Charger and Conditioner    The Battery Charger and Conditioner  M8043A  part number M8043 60000  is an external  device used to recharge and condition the monitor   s battery  To use the Battery Charger and  Conditioner  follow the instruction sheet delivered with it  For more information on bat
181. ifferent A D converter controls and wave processing  algorithms depending on the connected transducer  Pressure or Temperature  To recognize  the presence of a pressure transducer  a coding within the transducer is checked  To recognize  the presence of a temperature transducer  the transducer   s resistance 15 measured and must be  within specified limits  This is only done when no pressure transducer is present     Invasive Pressure Software Module    The Invasive Blood Pressure Module derives three numerical pressure values  systolic   diastolic  and mean   a blood pressure waveform and a pulse rate  The module is designed to  be used with DC pressure transducers  5 uV V mmHg  only  Alarm limits can be set for  pressure and pulse values  Alarm messages are issued if the calculated values are outside the  set range or outside the measurement range     Block diagram of the Invasive Pressure Software Module                                          Wave   o       B Pressure Waveform   e Processing     c   un     E Beat Average Pulse Rate    m       Calculation Pressure Values                  v     EB Acquisition  systolic  diastolic  mean     S Control l   LR            2 Pressure      Alarming     Pressure Alarms          S Lui   Pressure Pulse            User Controls       Signal Acquisition    This module is responsible for the A D conversion of the analog signal from the pressure  transducer  The Signal Acquisition module provides a raw pressure waveform to the Wave  Pro
182. igFiless amp P1   455          For writing   Error  Access to         wireless T aal ConfigFiless amp  P1  4b5 cfg was denied   5     The Configuration File is not updated with last user entered parameters        Running the Configuration Tool    Once the tool has been copied and made writeable  it can be run  The first step is to select  which device    Access Point  Switch  or M3 M4 Monitor    to configure   Step5 Run the configuration tools as follows    a  select Start in the lower left of the Windows Main Menu    b select Run in the Windows Workstation menu    Installing the Instrument 81    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure        click Browse to access the Browse application  d select ConfigTool in the tools menu of the stored configuration tools files  e  locate the file ConfigTool exe in the ConfigTool directory    f  double click ConfigTool exe to enter it into the Open  field of the Run  window     g click OK to open the Configuration Tool window     ContigT ool    Select Device to Configure  Firmware Select Serial Port  Revision  and        Port  then click OK    COMI       COM     Device ToContiqgure_FirmnwareRew     WB_WirelessM3_1 2b1 5 CFG   browse a       The Configuration Tool Window is used to select the Serial Port  COM1 or  COM2  on the configuring PC that will be used to perform the configuration and  the configuration file for the device being configured    Access Point  Network  Switch  or Wireless Bedside     Step 6 Select the Serial Port to be 
183. in sync  with ECG   Defib  synchronization  fails     Low light transmission of  SpO  sensor LEDs to the    sensor photo diode     Patient has low peripheral  perfusion    Replace the System  Board    Exchange the Server and  try again  Check the defib   cable     Check Transmission and  Perfusion Index as fol   lows    1  Fit SpO gt  sensor on your    finger   2  Enter Config Mode  3  Select 5         4  Switch SpO  On    Lightly press the Touch   strip until text appears at  the bottom of the screen     Perfusion Index xx x  Transm  red           Transm  infrared 7777    The Perfusion Index  should       gt  1 and both  Transmission indexes  should be greater than 10        191    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    192    Sidestream CO  Measurement Server Extension related problems    No wave dis   played and no  channel present    Accuracy prob   lems    1  Measurement Extension  is used with a monitor  and or Measurement  Server with Release A  software                   2 CO   Data Acquisition    hardware is incompatible  with wireless network   major revision number    10 and minor revision  number   30  and Meas   urement Server Extension  is used on a monitor with  wireless network option     3 No FilterLine attached    4      gt  measurement  switched off    5  Pump defective    6  Incorrect or defective  FilterLine    Incorrect N5O setting    Incorrect humidity correc   tion setting  BTPS STPD   Incorrect Max Hold set   ting   Invalid calibration   
184. ing Description  Number  Number    Cables with both ends terminated with straight MSL connectors    M3081A  A11 M3081 61602 453563377851 2m Measurement Server to Monitor  M3081A  A12 M3081 61603 453563402731 4m Measurement Server to Monitor    M3081 61626 453563474781 0 75m Measurement Server to Monitor   compatible IntelliVue cable     Unterminated cables    M3081A  A15 M3081 61615 453563484481 15m MSL Istallation Cable  Through Wall   M3081A  A25 M3081 61625 453563484491 25m MSL Istallation Cable  Through Wall     Face Plates    M3081A  C06 M3081 68708 453563484531 MSL Face Plate  US Version  pair of connector  boxes    M3081A    07 M3081 68708 453563484541 MSL Face Plate  US Version  pair of connector  boxes     Tools      M3086 43801 453563484771 Insertion Tool  LSA Plus Tool for connecting  cables     Local Recorder Serial Cable    M3000 61 613 453563484751 Serial interface cable for connecting the XE 50p  local recorder    272 Replacement Parts       MMS Measurement Server Link  MSL  Cable Clamp Kit    MMS Measurement Server Link  MSL  Cable Clamp Kit    12 Digit  Part Number Reordering Description  Number    M8000 6001 2 451261006611 MMS Measurement Server Link  MSL  Cable Clamp Kit     Kit contains    1 x MSL cable clamp  1 x Screw   1 x Installation Note        Wireless Assembly Exchange Parts    Exchange 12 Digit  Part Reordering Description  Number Number    M3046 69562   453563333471   Exchange Wireless Assembly for Australia   M3046 69563 453563333481   Exchange 
185. ings     Analog to Digital Converter  ADC     This is a 12 bit converter  Oversampling is used to get the required resolution  To optimize  the ADC input voltage  the variable gain adapts accordingly to the signal quality     Digital Signal Processor  DSP     The DSP demodulates and filters the signal from the ADC  and passes it on to the 5       ASIC     Self Test Signal Generator    This generates a wave that is similar to a patient signal  It is processed through the complete  circuitry starting at the photo amplifier stage  Just before the processing of the patient signal  begins  the test signal is switched on to check correct functioning of the circuitry     RCode Measurement Circuit    This circuit measures the coding resistor of the transducer  digitizes it  and sends it to the  SpO  CPU    Each transducer has coding resistors in the connector  so that it can be identified by this  measurement     CPU  ROM RAM and ASIC    The ASIC is the interface between the digital signal processor and the SpO  CPU    The ASIC also acts as an interface to the ADC and contains all the frequency generators for  the ADC clock  the sampling frequency and the modulation frequencyThe main clock for the  ASIC is provided by a Pierce oscillator circuit external to the chip     The CPU gets the processed SpO gt  signal from the ASIC  and controls the LED current  source  the RCode measurement  the variable gain stage  the clipping detection  the power  supply  and the Self Test circuit  The 
186. inter Port    You can use the JetEye holder  which comes with the M3080A Option      5  for optimal  positioning of the JetEye     Read the documentation supplied with the JetEye for information on the JetEye power  supply  the correct connection and so on     If you are using a printer with a built in infrared port  position the printer according to the  following guidelines     Installing the Instrument 95    Connecting a Remote Printer      within 100cm  40   of either infrared port  and    within 15  of the line perpendicular to the plane of the port     Connecting a Remote Printer    For remote printing on a network printer  the Monitor must be connected to the M3 network   The network cable is connected to the LAN socket on the back of the Monitor     WARNING The Monitor must be connected to the dedicated M3 network only  The special network    96    cables supplied by Philips Medical Systems for this purpose must be used  see the  IntelliVue Clinical Network Service Manual for details      Connecting a Local Recorder    You can connect a standalone strip chart recorder  option M3080    20  GSI Lumonics XE   50p  to your monitor via the serial recorder interface  available as option M3046A  J16  A  dedicated cable 1  supplied with the recorder  Details of how to set up  use and care for the  recorder are given in the Operator 5 Manual that accompanies it  Additional information can  be found in the Monitor s Instructions for Use     Secure  screw fasteners        Monito
187. ion by certain gases     Infrared light is absorbed by CO    The amount of absorption varies according to the          concentration in the gas mixture  By using an infrared detector to measure the absorption  the  CO   concentration in a gas can be derived     Introduction to the Instrument    Mainstream CO  Measurement    Mainstream CO  Features    This illustration shows the user controls on the Server and the connector for the mainstream  CO  measurement transducer on the Extension  The parts are described in the paragraphs  following the illustration        7  Connector for a    mainstream CO   transducer     Mainstream CO  Wave    The two calibration marks are located at 10  and 60  of wave channel height  The lower  calibration mark is labelled 0 mmHg  0 0 kPa  on all scales  The upper        is adjustable from  20 mmHg  2kPa  to 100 mmHg  13 kPa  in steps of 10 mmHg  1            CO     40    OK MK MEM       Wave Range    Calibration Marks       Measurement Mode    In the measurement mode  the Extension continuously measures CO  concentration and  calculates medical parameters          0 Correction    This can be turned on or off  If N5O correction is off  only oxygen cor   rection to CO   is made  In this case  it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mainly of       and      respiratory intensive care unit conditions      If N5O correction is on  oxygen and    0 correction to the CO   value is made  In this case     it is assumed that the gas mixture consists mai
188. it means that the smart  battery is really empty and cannot communicate  Normally the battery is in good order and  the message will disappear after 5 to 10 minutes of charging     To get the most out of a battery  observe the following guidelines       IMPORTANT  Leaving the battery in a monitor running on AC mains power will  shorten the life of the battery  ALWAYS remove the battery from the monitor when it  is not being used regularly as the main source of power for the monitor  Recharge the  battery every 3 to 4 months      The shelf life of a fully charged battery is about 6 months      Once a battery has been activated  keep it charged  If it is not in use  recharge it every 3 to 4  months      Condition the battery approximately every 50 recharge cycles       f the battery shows damage or signs of leakage  replace it immediately  Do not use a  faulty battery in the Monitor      Charging rate of the battery    Monitor Off  1 4 Amps   Monitor On  200 mAmps      Battery maintenance   We recommend you use the external Battery Charger and Condi   tioner  M8043A  to maintain and condition your batteries      Battery disposal   Batteries should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible man   ner  see also page 115   Consult the hospital administrator or your local Philips representa   tive for local arrangements    Do not dispose of the battery in normal waste containers     Checking the Battery Status    When the Monitor is connected to the AC mains power supply  the
189. k Bar    A double connector version of the Server to Monitor link bar allows quick and easy  connection to a Monitor on one side and a Measurement Server on the other  This allows the  Monitor to show waves and alarms of interest from both the Measurement Server and the  Measurement Server Extension     The interface subsystem consists of the physical interface to the Monitor and the  Measurement Server and controlling software     Digitized patient information transmitted over the link bar may be waves  e g  for ECG   pressure  respiration  etc    numeric information  for heart rate pulse  pressure values  and  respiration rate   or alert information  for alarms and assorted status information      M3015A Measurement Server Extension Theory of  Operation    The application specific software for the second pressure temp and CO  runs on the main  CPU in the Measurement Server  see    Measurement Server Theory of Operation    on   page 21   The pressure temperature and the CO  frontends communicate the pre processed  physiological data via the Frontend Link Protocol to the application specific software on the  main CPU of the Measurement Server     The Temp Press features available on the Extension are identical to those available on the  Server  The Temp Press selections specific to the Extension are T2 and P2     If you press the Zero key on the Server  all invasive pressure measurements in use are zeroed   To set independent zero and labels for P2  however  go into the Setup
190. l number of rotations per second  The microprocessor reads the values out  of the counters and adjusts the motor drive output accordingly     Infrared Detector  CO  Input Amplifier  Dual Slope A D  AZ Pulse Monoflop  and Bias Regulation    Signals from the infrared detector are amplified and passed through a dual slope Analog to   Digital converter  This converter is controlled by the microprocessor via the counters  The  conversion is started at a predefined time and is performed synchronously with motor  rotation     The following signals are produced and used as the input values for the mainstream CO   algorithm     e Zero  GZ    e Sample  GS      Reference  GR      An auto zero signal  AZ   which is derived from the output of the motor phase comparator     controls the bias regulation of the infrared detector  The AZ signal is enabled or disabled by  the microprocessor     60 Introduction to the Instrument    Tutorial for the Introduction to the Instrument    Tutorial for the Introduction to the Instrument    Question 1  Which is the complete list of what the Measurement Server measure         The Multi Measurement Server acquires the physiological signals          respiration  invasive and non invasive blood pressure  oxygen saturation of the  blood  and temperature     b  The Multi Measurement Server acquires the physiological signals ECG   respiration  non invasive blood pressure  and oxygen saturation of the blood     c  The Multi Measurement Server acquires the physi
191. layed values   Step 8 Document the value displayed by the M3046A  x1      Step 9 Ifthe difference between the manometer and displayed values is greater than 3  mmHg  calibrate the Server  If not proceed to the Leakage test     Step 10 To calibrate  select    Close Valves off    then    Calibrate NBP    and wait for the  Instrument to pump up the expansion chamber     Step 11 When pumping has stopped  wait a few seconds until    EnterPrVal    is highlighted  and then move the cursor to the value shown on the manometer     NOTE If one of the following prompt messages appears during this step  check whether there is  leakage in the setup         NBP unable to calibrate cannot adjust pressure      NBP unable to calibrate   unstable signal  Step 12 Press Confirm   NOTE If the INOP NBP Equipment Malfunction message occurs in Monitoring Mode  go back to  Service Mode and repeat the calibration procedure   NBP Leakage Test  This test checks the integrity of the system and the valve  The NBP leakage test is required  once every two years and when the Instrument is repaired or when Instrument parts are    replaced     Step 1 If you have calibrated  repeat steps 2 to 6 from the Accuracy test procedure so that  you have 280 mmHg pressure on the expansion chamber     Step 2 Watch the pressure value for 60 seconds     Step 3 Calculate and document the leakage test value  x2           PLSP   where   1 is the pressure at the beginning of the leakage test and P2 is the pressure  displayed aft
192. le set  The conventional 12 lead ECG capability of M3001A  C12 and  C18 only works with the  IntelliVue family of monitors  You can connect a 10 electrode lead set  for example  if a patient is  transferred from an IntelliVue monitor   but only the standard five electrodes  RA  LA  RL  LL  and V   are used for monitoring  The rest are automatically ignored        Replacement Parts 261    Multi Measurement Server Parts    M3000A Measurement Server Parts    Description       M3000A Rel  A    Part Number    12 Digit    Reordering  Number       Exchange Parts    Part Number    12 Digit    Reordering  Number          Exchange Measurement Server   English  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   French  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   German  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Dutch  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Spanish  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Italian  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Norwegian  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Swedish  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Finnish  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Japanese  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Danish  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Traditional Chinese  Rel  A   Exchange Measurement Server   Simplified Chinese  Rel  A   Exchange Measurement Server   Portuguese  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Greek  Rel  A    Exchange Measurement Server   Russian  Rel  A     Exchange Measurement Server   Polish  Rel  A        262    M3000 6001A    M
193. ling of the display wave for the best fit for the display channel     Introduction to the Instrument    Non invasive Blood Pressure  NBP  Measurement    Non invasive Blood Pressure  NBP  Measurement    Description    The Measurement Server has a non invasive blood pressure measurement for the Monitor  monitoring device  It is designed to be used with adult  paediatric  or neonatal patients  in  ICU and OR environments     Measurements    The measurement produces numerics for the systolic  diastolic  and mean blood pressure  values  No wave is associated with this measurement     Three different methods can be used to obtain the measurements  as follows       Manual   For each request  one measurement of systolic  diastolic  and mean pressures is  taken       Auto   Repeated measurements of the three values are taken at timed intervals specified by  the user     e Stat   Measurements of the three values are taken immediately and repeatedly over     period of five minutes  This method uses a faster measurement procedure but produces a  less accurate reading     NBP Features    This illustration shows the user controls and connector for the measurements  The parts are  described in the paragraphs following the illustration         Start Stop Stat Key    A single press key  used to start   or stop a manual measurement    or start an automatic measurement cycle     A standard NBP connector  connects to the cuff     Introduction to the Instrument 29    Non invasive Blood Pressure  
194. ll  be used     The Monitor should be investigated technically   however  as soon as possible     ECG EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server   The Measurement Server should be investigated  technically as soon as possible     NBP EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server   The Measurement Server should be investigated  technically as soon as possible     Pressure Zero  amp  Check Pressure must be zeroed  or calibration required   Cal Zero the Pressure  or check the calibration   If unsuccessful  exchange the Measurement Server     PRESS EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server or Measurement Server  Extension   The Measurement Server or Measurement Server  Extension should be investigated technically as  soon as possible     RESP EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server   The Measurement Server should be investigated  technically as soon as possible     210 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Troubleshooting the Installed Instrument    Message What To Do    SpO  EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server   The Measurement Server should be investigated  technically as soon as possible     TEMP EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchange the  Measurement Server or Measurement Server  Extension   The Measurement Server or Measurement Server  Extension should be investigated technically as  soon as possible     CO  EQUIP MALF Measurement defective  Exchang
195. lling the Instrument 117    Answers to the Tutorial for Installing the Instrument    118 Installing the Instrument    3 Maintaining the Instrument       Objectives    In order to meet this chapter s objectives  you should be able to perform light maintenance  and preventive maintenance for the Monitor  the Measurement Server and  where present  the  Measurement Server Extension through the following tasks        nspection of the Instrument      Cleaning of the Instrument      Replacement of Preventive Maintenance Parts     Battery Handling  Maintenance  and Good Practices     This chapter provides an overall maintenance frequency timetable as well as a checklist of  maintenance procedures which include  for the sake of completeness  comprehensive  reference to the repair procedures found in  Repairing the Instrument  and to the testing  procedures found in  Testing the Instrument      The tests included in  Testing the Instrument  are functionality assurance tests  performance  assurance tests  preventive maintenance tests   accuracy and performance procedures  and  patient safety checks used to verify that the Instrument is operating properly     Concepts    Light Light maintenance tasks can be defined as those tasks required to maintain   Maintenance the Instrument in clean  functional working order  These include inspection   cleaning practice and battery maintenance as well as the continuous  observation of replaceable parts for wear     Battery A rechargeable battery mus
196. ly       Documentation CD ROM including Instructions for Use  Quick Reference Guide  and  Service Guide     The box containing your Measurement Server contains only the Measurement Server     The box containing an M3016A Measurement Server Extension contains only the  Measurement Server Extension     The box containing an M3015A Measurement Server Extension contains the Measurement  Server Extension and the associated accessories     In addition you should receive all of the options and accessories that you have ordered   If anything is missing  contact your Philips Medical Systems representative immediately     If anything has been damaged in transit  keep the packing material for inspection and contact  your Philips Medical Systems representative immediately     Do not use the Monitor if the casing has been damaged     If the Monitor is damaged  make sure that the screen is not leaking  There is no known danger  from the fluid of irritation to skin or eyes  or by inhalation  The median lethal dose if taken  orally is 2 0g kg    There are no special procedures necessary for cleaning spilled fluid     Installing the Monitor    Avoid placing the Monitor  Measurement Server or Measurement Server Extension  underneath an infusion bag  Make sure that infusion liquid cannot get into any of the  Measurement or Monitor connectors     Be sure to read the sections on    Preparing to Install the Monitor  on page 64 and    Unpacking  the Monitor  on page 70 before continuing     To inst
197. ly adjusted    Power is not connected  or switched on    Battery not installed or  empty  Battery LED  flashes red  or flashes  red when you press the  On Off Standby switch         Possible Cause What To Do    Check that a Measurement  Server and all the required  transducers are connected   Connect a Measurement  Server     Connect the required  transducers     Replace the suspect  transducer     Exchange the Measurement  Server    The Measurement Server  should be investigated  technically as soon as  possible     Adjust brightness controls   The screen may not be as   bright when the Monitor is  operating from the battery     Connect power and switch on  the Monitor     Fit a charged battery and  switch on the Monitor     213    Troubleshooting During After a Software Upgrade    214    Troubleshooting During After a Software Upgrade    Message            Link Bar detected   please apply          Please remove service Link  Bar after service     Error codes 20210  20307   20002  20102  206nn 20nnn     What To Do    The service Link Bar must be directly connected  to the Measurement Server  Make sure that no  Measurement Extension  M3015 16A  is attached  and that the Measurement Server is not attached by  cable to the Link Bar    The service Link Bar has been left connected   reconnect the standard link bar before continuing    Several error codes will occur as a result of an  upgrade and do not require any action  In order to  assess which codes result from an upgrade you
198. mart Battery Charger and Conditioner   Exchange          XE 50p Recorder Exchange Parts    Exchange Part 12 digit Reordering    Number Number Description       M3080 60100 453563485281 Exchange XE 50p Local Recorder    274 Replacement Parts          AC Power   connector  5   LED  5  Accuracy and Calibration Procedures  155  Accuracy and Performance Procedures  155  adjustments  iv  alarm   limit  10   message  10  analog ECG signal  67  anesthetics   operation in presence of flammable  66  Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Plethysmog    raphy  SpO  PLETH  Module   Block Diagram  34  38   Description  33  37   Features  33   PLETH Waveform  33  Safety  33   Measurements  33  37   Theory of Operation  34  38  assembly  iv    Backlight Test  207  Backlight Tube Assembly  123  BAD SERVER LINK  INOP description  177  Barometric Pressure  Calibration  149  Battery  charging  129  battery  charging  battery conditioner  131  compartment  5  conditioning  131  LED  5  trickle charging and care  132  BATTERY EMPTY  INOP description  177  Battery Handling  127  Battery handling  127  Battery Level Low message  210  BATTERY LOW  INOP description  177  BATTERY MALFUNCT   INOP description  178  Battery Status  checking  127  window  132  brain examination  65    Check and          cabinet grounding  64  cabinet installation  66  Cause of Failure  183  CHARGER MALFUNCT  INOP description  178  Check for Obvious Problems  166  CHECK INPUT DEVICE  INOP description  178  Check Status Log message 
199. measuring respiration     24 Introduction to the Instrument    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    Safety    To ensure the safety of the patient  the patient applied parts are isolated from ground by  optical isolators and a transformer  The circuit is also encapsulated in plastic     Block Diagram of the ECG Resp                                                                                                                            RA     Input        CPU  LA     Protection       ECG ROM RAM  LL  gt    Network     ASIC mm  To From  RL         lt   gt  System CPU  ECG A A  Electrodes p  Y  From  Patient Bridge  amp     Demodulator  Amplifier  t    Respiration  Excitation  Current  Source  Theory of Operation    As ECG and Resp signals pass from the patient to the Monitor  they progress through stages  corresponding to the logical sections of the circuit  as shown in the block diagram  Circuit   related faults can generally be isolated to one of the stages     Transducer    Signals are received through patient electrodes and lead cables via the input connector     Input Protection Network    The Input Protection Network and ESU filter eliminate extraneous signals  This protects the  rest of the circuitry from defibrillator voltages  high frequency interference signals  and  electrostatic discharges     ECG ASIC    The signals are processed by the ECG Application Specific Integrated Circuit  ECG ASIC   which has an input amplifier with a fixed gain for eac
200. ment 107    Installing the Measurement Server Mounting Options    108    reinforcement    Installing the Measurement Server Mounting Options    To allow the Measurement Server to be mounted remotely from the Monitor  special  mounting plates are available  One plate can be used to mount the Server to a wall or other  fixture  The second type can be used for vertical or horizontal mounting on a pole or rail     New mounting plates are supplied with a MSL cable clamp  and are reinforced by a metal  plate at the rear  The MSL cable clamp ensures a secure fit between the MSL cable and the  mounting plate  It is important for the customer to decide whether the MSL cable clamp  is to be used or not at installation time  as once the decision is taken to fit the clamp  the  MSL cable should not be removed from the clamp     You cannot fit the MSL cable clamp to earlier versions of the mounting plate     Server Mounting Plate  M3080A  A01     This option includes a pack of 5 mounting plates  To mount the plate securely  you need two  screws per plate  These are not provided because the type of surface dictates the type of  screw     MSL cable clamp       Rear view  new version     Step 1 Unpack the plates and check all parts are available     Step2 Select a mounting plate  and if applicable  fit the MSL cable clamp to the mounting  plate  using the supplied Torx T 10 screw        Installing the Instrument    Installing the Measurement Server Mounting Options            Place the cable
201. ment Server  FEL Addresses  MSL connector     Opto coupler    and Power   Mainstream        CO  Transducer    Transformer       Floating Non floating    J isolation                  oO      E PRESS  Pressure or  PEN Temperature              TEMP P       Transducer  435  5 5              Main Functional Areas      Front End Board   consisting of the        Front End  PRESS TEMP Front End and the  Floating Non floating isolation area all feeding signals to the DC DC Converter Board       DC DC Converter Board   connecting to the Floating Non floating isolation area on the    Front End Board  Consisting also of a multiplexer for Front End Link communication to  the Measurement Server     Introduction to the Instrument 55    Mainstream CO  Measurement    56    Mainstream CO  Measurement    Description    The M3016A Measurement Server Extension has a mainstream carbon dioxide respiratory  gas measurement for the Monitor monitoring device  It is designed to be used with the  M3000A Measurement Server for adult  pediatric  or neonatal patients  in a hospital  environment and during patient transport in and outside hospitals by clinical users     CO  respiratory gas measurements indicate the efficiency of the transfer of oxygen from  alveolar air into pulmonary capillary blood and the elimination of carbon dioxide from  pulmonary capillary blood and its transfer into alveolar air     CO   respirato as measurements are evaluated as eas passes through the airway adapter on  2 resp ry 8
202. ment Server  the  Measurement Server Extension and the Monitor for general condition  Clean or  replace contacts or housings that are damaged  corroded or dirty  Examine them  carefully to detect breaks in the insulation  Ensure that the cable connectors are  properly engaged     Inspect the patient cables and leads and their strain reliefs for general condition   Examine cables carefully to detect breaks in the insulation and to ensure that they    are gripped securely in the connectors of each end to prevent rotation or other strain     Flex the patient cable near each end to verify that there are no intermittent faults     Maintaining the Instrument                Preventive Maintenance Tasks    Preventive Maintenance Tasks    M3046A    Preventive maintenance for the Monitor comprises the following activities   e Perform visual inspection  see Inspecting the Instrument  on page 122       Replace the Backlight Tube Assembly  if required      Replacing the Backlight Tube Assembly    The intensity of the fluorescent tube used for backlight illumination of the LCD Display  gradually decreases over time  As a result  periodic replacement is necessary     Philips recommends replacement of the Backlight Tube Assembly after 3 years  20 000  hours  of continuous use or if there is noticeable decrease in the display illumination    Display illumination decreases by about half after 3 years of continuous use   The procedure    for replacing the Backlight Tube Assembly is found in  Re
203. ment may be contaminated with bacteria  Protect  yourself from possible infection by wearing examination gloves during these  procedures     Removing the Front Cover   To remove the front cover  do the following    Step 1 Remove the Server and the Monitor from the Extension    Step 2 Use    thin bladed screwdriver to prise the grey front cover  the console covering the  measurement connector hardware  gently from the bottom of the Extension     Position the screwdriver in the small slits provided for this purpose  The front cover  then clicks away from the Extension        Step 3 Remove the front cover     Repairing the Instrument                            Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    Removing the Extension Bottom Cover    To remove the Extension bottom cover  do the following     Step 1 Position the Extension on the dual link bar with the measurement connector  hardware facing upwards and the arm of the dual link bar towards you  There are  four long mounting pins threaded into the Extension in each of the four corners  under the cover  Locate the heads of the two long mounting pins on the side away  from you        Step 2 Use tweezers to prise the pins gently out enough to be removed by hand   Step3 Remove the two pins and set them aside for refitting     Do not lose these long mounting pins since the Extension will not function unless they are in  place     Step 4 Using your hands  gently pry the bottom cover away from the Extensio
204. n Follow the recommended  actions from INOP table    1  Check Settings        0 correction      BTPS      STPD            Hold or standard  averaging   2  Perform accuracy check  on calstick and calibrate   if necessary     1  Check if the Measure   ment Extension is sup   ported by the system  configuration  hardware  and software     2  Check that        meas   urement 1s switched on    Audio Speaker related problems    Buzzing noise  accompanying  alarm  INOP  or  QRS sound     No tone alarms     Speaker will not  Work     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Speaker mounting prob   lem  for example  the  speaker 1  ajar due to  being dropped     Make sure audible tones  are switched on     Cable disconnected   Defective speaker     Defective Audio Circuit        Mount speaker properly or  replace speaker     Reconnect cable   Replace speaker     Replace the System  Board     193    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Buzzing noise Defective Audio Circuit  Replace the System  in Instrument  Board     Defective Power Supply     Replace the Power Sup   ply        194 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Recorder Problems  refer also to the Operator s Manual of the XE 50p    Chart Recorder   Message       Local Recorder  Malfunction     prompt message       Local Recorder  check cable     prompt message    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Command error     Syntax error in either the  Recorder or Monitor  software 
205. n System Board is replaced or exchanged for a new one  a  new Power Supply is also required  The old Power Supply is not compatible with the new  Main System Board     Old Connector Board and Cover   An old version Connector Board and cover  no VGA   can be used with all new parts  This part will remain available for replacement use in existing  Monitors     New Connector Board and Cover   A new Connector Board  VGA  and cover can be used  with the old Power Supply and the old Monitor Bezel  It cannot be used with the old Main  System Board or the old Chassis and Housing  If an old version Connector Board  no VGA   and cover is replaced or exchanged for a new Connector Board  VGA  and cover  a new  Main System Board and a new Chassis and Housing are also required     The new Connector Board  VGA  is fixed with a screw and can no longer be taken out by  removing the Connector Board cover and pulling the Connector Board out  The Plastic  Housing must be completely removed  see  Repairing the Instrument   to allow the  Connector Board to be unscrewed from the side of the Monitor     Old Power Supply    An old version Power Supply can be used with all new parts except the  new Main System Board  If an old Power Supply is replaced or exchanged  it must be  replaced with the old version Power Supply which is still available  A new Power Supply  cannot be used with an old Main Board  This part will remain available for replacement use  in existing Monitors     New Power Supply   A n
206. n at the link  bar end first  The bottom cover is press latched at the link bar end  Remove it gently  making sure not to bang or touch the inside of the Extension     If you accidentally try to remove the wrong side of the bottom cover  you will notice that it is  attached to the inside of the Extension with a ribbon connector and that the dual link bar  prevents you from removing it completely  Do not try to forcibly remove the wrong side of  the M3015A cover  you cannot access replaceable parts from this side     Repairing the Instrument 233    Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    The following illustration shows the location of the replaceable parts in the M3015A  Measurement Server Extension     Brackets holding the  Pump       Scrubber       CO  Scrubber    234 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension    Removing the CO  Scrubber  To remove the CO  Scrubber  do the following     Step 1 Locate the CO  Scrubber in the Extension     Step 2 Being careful not to touch anything else in the Extension  use tweezers to pull the  body of the CO   Scrubber out of the bracket       Step 3 Holding the body of the CO  Scrubber with your fingers  carefully disconnect the  Extension intake tube from the scrubber end and remove the        Scrubber from the  Extension     Step 4 Dispose of the CO  Scrubber according to local legal requirements for low volume  chemical waste     Repairing the Instrument
207. n using 2nd cal gas         steps should be performed in the same session     Barometric Pressure Check and Calibration  Check the barometric pressure value in the sidestream CO  Extension as follows   Step 1 Go into Service Mode and select            Step 2 Connect a FilterLine to the sidestream CO  input  This activates the pump in the  sidestream CO  Extension     Step 3 Check the status line at the bottom of the screen  It will display    CO  pressure  reading  ambient cell  xxx yyy  where xxx is the ambient pressure and yyy is the  measured cell pressure   The values are displayed with a resolution of 2 mmHg up  to 475 mmHg and a resolution of 1 mmHg from 475 mmHg to 825 mmHg   Check  whether the ambient pressure value  x1  matches  within the acceptable tolerance of   12mm Hg  the reference value you have received  If so  proceed to      Leakage  Check  If the value 1  not correct  calibrate as follows     149    Preventive Maintenance Tests    NOTE    150    Step 4    Step 5    Step 6    Step 7    Step 8    Select CO  then select Barom Press  A table of values is activated     Select the value in the table which matches the reference value received from a  reliable local source  airport  regional weather station or hospital weather station      The selected value must be within  10  of the current measured ambient pressure   otherwise an error message will occur at restarting the Monitor     Confirm the barometric pressure setting     Check that the ambient pressure di
208. nce between the Printer and the Wireless IR Printer Connector   this distance can be a maximum of 1 2m due to cable length     Distance  A   B   C  must be a minimum of 1 5m  4 9ft        Installing the Instrument    Connecting a Local Printer    Step 1 Attach the support tray to the front  right corner of the table mount  The plastic  support tray push fits over the lip of the table mount  Make sure the dove tail slot on  the tray engages with the table mount correctly    Step 2 Remove the adhesive protection strip from the support tray and attach one half of  the velcro fixing onto it  Attach the other half of the velcro to the bottom of the  Wireless Infrared Printer Connector by peeling off the protective label    Step 3 Attach the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector firmly onto the support tray     ensuring that the velcro fixings align   It may be helpful to place the Monitor in  position to line up the infrared devices      Connecting a Local Printer    WARNING The printer and any other non medical equipment  such as the infrared to parallel  converter  are not allowed to be used within the patient vicinity  1 5m 4 9 ft      If you are using an infrared to parallel converter  do the following   Step 1 Connect the parallel port to the printer   Step 2 Position the converter according to the following guidelines     e within 100cm  40     of the infrared port  and      within 15   of the line perpendicular to the plane of the port                 E         40          Pr
209. nd Good Practices    WARNING    130    Conditioning a Battery    What is Battery Conditioning     Battery conditioning recalibrates the battery to ensure that it has accurate information on the  actual battery capacity     Why is Battery Conditioning Necessary     The capacity of a battery decreases gradually over the lifetime of a battery  Each time a  battery is charged its capacity decreases slightly  Therefore  the operating time of a monitor  running off the battery also decreases with each charge cycle     Battery conditioning ensures that the value stored in the battery for its full capacity takes    account of this decrease  so that the remaining battery charge can be calculated accurately   and the low battery warning given at the right time     When Should Battery Conditioning be Performed   Battery conditioning should be performed     Every 50 charge discharge cycles  or every three months  which ever comes first       When indicated by the Battery Status     What Causes the Conditioning Message on the Monitor     In addition to the value for the full capacity  the battery also stores a value for the Max Error   The Max Error tracks the maximum possible deviation of the estimated charge of a battery  from the actual charge     If a battery is charged or discharged partially  or if it is charged while the monitor is being  used  the accuracy of the  reference points  for the fully discharged and fully charged states  decreases  causing an increase in the value for t
210. ndition occurs once  it requires no action  If it occurs  repeatedly  pass the information on to your Philips representative for analysis    T    as            Table 2  Error Codes for Release       Device Error    ID Code Information Required Action    Severity    M3000A Measurement Server    17300 20001 Software Condition  17300 20046 Software Condition       Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 3 Using Support Functions    Table 2  Error Codes for Release B    Severity Information Required Action    17300 20307 Results from an upgrade to another monitor  option  no action required   32749 20002 Measurement Extension has been exchanged   no action required    M3046A Monitor    Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition  Software Condition              Troubleshooting the Instrument 20    Part 3 Using Support Functions    202       Table 2  Error Codes for Release B    Device Error  ID Code    Severity Information Required Action    Table 3  Error Codes for Release C    Device Error    ID Code Information Required Action    Severity    M3000A Measurement Server    17300 20096 Software Condition    H 17300 20307 Can occur during or after upgrades  no action  required    M3046A Monitor           MM       Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 
211. nk      Make sure that the printer is connected to the  Philips LAN or the MG Print Server  network  see  Connecting a Remote Printer in  Installing the  Instrument      Make sure that the printer 1s switched on     The laser printer was switched off  but the Jet Eye  was left on  This results in the described  behaviour  Users should be advised always to  switch the printer and Jet Eye off together     This can happen if the JetEye is switched on but  the printer is switched off when you start printing   Make sure both the printer and  if necessary  the  JetEye are switched on  then print again     Check that the Monitor is connected to the Philips  LAN or the MG Print Server  network    If it is not  connect it  see Connecting a Remote  Printer in  Installing the Instrument      If it is connected  contact the M3 Print Server  system administrator     Check that the network printer is switched on and  not in an error condition    If it is both switched on and in an error free  condition  contact the M3 Print Server system  administrator        Troubleshooting the Recorder Connection    Here 15 a list of some easily corrected troubleshooting cases  See also page 195  and the  Operator   s Manual of the XE 50p Chart Recorder     Message    You cannot find the record  softkeys     Troubleshooting the Instrument    What To Do    Make sure that the Recorder is configured  see     Connecting a Local Recorder    on page 96      215    Troubleshooting the Recorder Connection    You
212. nly of O5 and    0  operating room condi   tions      Introduction to the Instrument 57    Mainstream CO  Measurement      O5 Correction    There is a fixed correction of 45            Humidity Correction    This correction is selectable between Body Temperature Pressure  Saturated  BTPS  and Standard Pressure Temperature Dry  STPD   The Extension meas   ures BTPS and uses this correction formula     Psrpp   Parps  Pabs  P          2      where Pipo   47mmHg      Max Hold    There are three possible selections     Off   The         numerics display the breath to breath value       10 seconds    The         numerics display the highest value within a moving window  over a 10 second period       20 seconds    The EtCO  numerics display the highest value within a moving window  over a 20 second period     Safety    To ensure the safety of the patient  the patient applied part is isolated from ground by opto   couplers and a transformer  The circuit is also encapsulated in plastic     58 Introduction to the Instrument    Mainstream CO  Measurement    Block Diagram of the Mainstream CO  measurement          SYALNNOO          V09t HAODNGSNVEL                                            1                        HOSN3S  due                                                           OldO                                                                            MOO  ASNAS                            MOO                                               INOud33                                
213. nt 189    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    190            Central    duplicate moni   tor label     prompt message      Assigned Cen   tral 1s not avail   able  prompt  message       No Central    software incom   patible  prompt  message     Central can not  identify this  bed  prompt  message    Monitor label configura   tion 1s 1n conflict with  another monitor    The Information Center 1s  switched off or not acces   sible    The location of this bed 1s  not clear     Measurement Server related problems    Check that the monitor  label assigned to this mon   itor has not been changed  locally  Check the assign   ment at the Information  Center    Ask Biomed department  to check software revi   SIONS     Check the bed assign   ments at the Information  Center        No waves     No ECG data or  waveform dis   played when  both defib sync  and balloon  pump are done  together     Measurement Server  defective     LEDs on display unit  blink but Server LED does  not     2 circuit cable used in a 3   circuit ECG output jack     Check green LED on  Server  Exchange the  Server     Connection between the  Server and the display 15  lost  Exchange the Server     Use a bud box when set   ting up               Troubleshooting the Instrument    Red ECG LED  1S On     SpO   values    appear unstable  or unreliable    Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    System Board is defec   tive    Defib  synchronization is  not 
214. nt 87    Configuring the Monitor    Step 4 Select Reference     Step 5 Select Auscult  or Invasive     For versions of the M3046A Monitor with software revision D or lower  do the following  In  service mode     Step 1 Select Setup            Step 2 Select        Mode     Step    Select desired        measurement characteristic according to the table and graphs    below   Selection Factory Default  2 NBP measurement  characteristic of M3 M4 Rel   B and earlier   Recommended if customer  prefers calibration against  manual auscultatory  reference method   3 NBP measurement   Factory characteristic of M3 M4 Rel   Default  C and D     88    Recommended if customer  prefers calibration against  intra arterial reference  method     Description    Auscultatory according to ANSI AAMI  SP10 1992    The blood pressure measurements  determined with this device and  measurement characteristic set to  2   comply with the American National  Standard for Electronic or Automated  Sphygmomanometers  ANSI AAMI SP   10 1992  in relation to mean error and  standard deviation  when compared to  auscultatory measurements in a  representative patient population  For the  auscultatory reference the 5th Korotkoff  sound was used to determine the diastolic  pressure     Intra arterial according to ANSI AAMI  SP10 1992    The blood pressure measurements  determined with this device and  measurement characteristic set to  3   comply with the American National  Standard for Electronic or Automated  Sphy
215. nt Problems   This part provides the following      Tables that list Instrument symptoms as well as causes and remedies for Instrument faults     Techniques for troubleshooting the Instrument before you disassemble it      Checks you can make to isolate problems down to a specific replaceable part  for example     the Power Supply     You can often determine whether a failure has occurred simply by referring to the  troubleshooting table in    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems      Part 3 Using Support Functions   This part describes support features available to the  Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension as follows       Information on how to use error codes     A description of the boot process     Concepts    Trouble This is the essential diagnostic step to be taken prior to any repair   shooting    INOPs and These are the types of messages that generate and display to inform the user  Error Codes when the Instrument has been unable to perform an operation     Troubleshooting the Instrument 165    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    NOTE    166    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Checks for Obvious Problems    When first troubleshooting the Instrument  check for obvious problems by answering basic  questions such as the following     1 Is the power switch turned on   2 1  the battery adequately charged     3 Ifrunning from mains power supply  is the AC power cord connected to the Instrument  and plugged into an AC outlet     4 Are the 
216. nt panel    b  On the Measurement Server    c  On the System Board in the M3046A  visible from the rear of the monitor    d  On the M3046A located on the bottom of the monitor     e  a  b  and c     Question 4  Non fatal error codes are only available in     a  Monitoring Mode  b  Configuration Mode  c  Service Mode    d  Operating Mode    Troubleshooting the Instrument 217    Answers to the Tutorial for Troubleshooting the Instrument    Answers to the Tutorial for Troubleshooting the  Instrument    1       See page 197 for more details    2  a   See page 208 for more details    3  e   See pages 5 2 to page 175 for more details      4       See pages 197 for more details      218 Troubleshooting the Instrument       Repairing the Instrument       Objectives    To meet the goals of this chapter  you should be able to disassemble the Instrument down to  replacement part level     The main replaceable assemblies for the Monitor are as follows       The Power Supply    e The System Board      The Connector Board      The LCD Assembly      The Display Backlight Tubes     The removal and replacement procedures for the Monitor are easy to complete when you  follow the step by step procedures in this chapter     The main replaceable assemblies for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  units with  serial number prefix DEO20xxxxx only  are as follows       The CO   Scrubber       The Pump     The removal and replacement procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  are eas
217. nting plate  using the supplied  Torx T 10 screw  as described for the server mounting plate  M3080A A02   starting on page 108  steps 2 to 5     Step3 Secure the clamp to a pole or rail    The Server snap fits onto the plate  To release the Server  press and hold the latch  in the    middle at the top of the mount  away from the Server and slide it out  To rotate the plate   press and hold the lever on the clamp away from plate while rotating the plate     Mounting Options for the Local Recorder    Two mounting solutions are available for the optional XE 50p strip chart recorder       Roll Stand including Down Pole  M3080A  A30     Wall Mount  M3080A  A31     Please refer to the installation instructions that accompany the mounting hardware for details  of how to mount the recorder     Installing the Instrument 111    MSL Cable Termination    NOTE    112       MSL Cable Termination    The following installation procedure describes how to install the wall installation cable kit  when the patient monitor and the measurement server are not located at the same site  The kit  consists of two connector boxes and a cable  15m or 25m      For this procedure you need the Insertion Tool  M3086 43801  and a small screwdriver     Step 1 Draw the MSL cable through the wall from the site of the monitor to the site of the  measurement server     Each MSL face plate kit contains two connector boxes  one in going and one out   going   The US version contains an additional rectangular wall mo
218. ntroller  The Display Video Controller runs the software that controls the display  This software  processes the high level display command to generate and format the screen characters     graphics  and wave plots  and also generates the video control signals for the LCD display     The software continuously checks the functionality of the hardware in the Display Controller   and issues an error indication    the event of a hardware malfunction     Introduction to the Instrument 17    Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware    18    Human Interface Controller    The Human Interface Controller  HIF  is the interface between the operator and the Monitor  itself  It monitors the operator controls and the Battery Controller  formats the data  and  routes it to the Display  amp  Operator Controls Manager from which it receives commands and  status also  As well  the HIF controls the features listed below     Visual Indicators  The Instrument is fitted with the following front panel indicators         Yellow LED    This flashes in addition to the visual indication on the LCD display when a  yellow alarm situation occurs  medium severity alarm      e Red LED    This flashes in addition to the visual indication on the LCD display and the  audible tone from the loudspeaker when a red alarm situation occurs  high severity alarm      e Crossed Bell LED   This is illuminated when all alarms have been suspended     Alarm Relay    In addition to the audible and visual alarms  an ala
219. olerance    Open the valve on the flow regulator to allow 10  CO  gas to flow into the  Extension  Allow the value to stabilize     Check that the value on the instrument  x8  matches the calculated mmHg value  within the calculated tolerance  If so  the Measurement Extension is correctly  calibrated  If the value is outside the tolerance  calibrate as follows    If not already connected  connect the 5  calibration gas     Select Cal             Testing the Instrument    Preventive Maintenance Tests    Step 11 Select the value for the calibration gas   The default value is 5 0     Step 12 Open the valve on the calibration gas to allow CO  gas to flow into the Extension   Allow the value to stabilize before the start of the calibration  Leave the valve open    until the instrument gives a prompt that gas can be removed     Step 13 The Extension calibrates and prompts when calibration is successful     Calibration Verification  Step 1 Reopen the 5  gas valve and allow the value to stabilize     Step 2 Check that the value displayed on the Monitor is correct within the tolerance  see  Step 2 above      Step 3 Disconnect the 5  calibration gas and connect the 10  calibration gas     Step 4 Open the valve on the flow regulator to allow 10  CO   gas to flow into the  Extension  Allow the value to stabilize     Step 5 Check that the value displayed on the Monitor is correct within the tolerance  see  Step 6 above      If one or both values are not within tolerances  the M3015A must 
220. ological signals ECG  invasive  and non invasive blood pressure  oxygen saturation of the blood  and  temperature     Question 2  What is wireless printing  Does the M3046 Monitor support it     a  A wireless interface functions in the same way as a normal serial interface except  that a modulated infrared beam is used to exchange data and status information  instead of a wire connection  Wireless printing is not presently supported on the  M3046 Monitor     b  A wireless interface functions in the same way as a normal serial interface except  that a modulated infrared beam is used to exchange data and status information  instead of a wire connection  The IrDA interface in the M3046 Monitor provides  a wireless interface to an external printer     c  A wireless interface functions in the same way as a normal serial interface except  that a modulated infrared beam is used to exchange data and status information  instead of a wire connection  There is no such product as yet     Question 3  According to this Service Guide  how many layers is the Measurement Server  software divided into     a  12   b 2      4     Introduction to the Instrument 61    Answers to the Tutorial for the Introduction to the Instrument    62    Answers to the Tutorial for the Introduction to the  Instrument    1  a   See page 2 for more details    2  b   See page 15 for more details      3  c   See page 21 for more details      Introduction to the Instrument    2       Installing the Instrument    Objec
221. ometric Pressure  Check and Calibration    on page 149       Perform leakage check  see    Leakage Check         page 150     Perform Pump Check      Perform flow check and calibrate  if necessary  see    Flow Rate Check and Calibration  on  page 151     e Perform Noise Check      Perform        calibration check  check the date of the last calibration and calibrate  if neces   sary  see    CO  Gas Measurement Calibration Check  on page 152          f calibration done  perform CO  calibration verification using 2nd calibration gas       f M3015A has been opened  perform a system safety test  see    Patient Safety Checks  on  page 159     Tools Required    e Standard tools  e g  screwdriver  tweezers    ESD protection equipment  e Electronic flowmeter  M1026 60144    Gas calibration equipment    Cal 1 gas 15210 64010  5  CO       Cal 2 gas 15210 64020  10  CO       Cal gas flow regulator M2267A    Cal tube 13907A    Required Replacement Part      Pump assembly and CO   scrubber  M3015 29303     Maintaining the Instrument                General Cleaning of the Instrument    Replacement of the Pump and CO  Scrubber    Replacement of the Pump and        Scrubber is supported for units with serial number  prefix DE020xxxxx only  Where a recommendation is made to replace the Pump and CO   Scrubber  this applies only to these earlier units  If the Pump and CO   Scrubber are defective  in later units with serial number prefix DE435xxxxx  repair is effected by M3015A unit  exchange   
222. ompt of the color LCD display  notifying the user     Recorder Manager  The recorder manager formats and records the following on a local recorder         Real time or Delayed Recording    The user can select between a real time local  recording or a delayed recording     A real time recording is started by pressing the Local Record SmartKey  When a recording  is running  you can stop it by pressing the key again     A delayed recording can be started by pressing the Local Delayed SmartKey  Pressing the  key again will extend the recording     Tabular Trend Report   tThe recorder manager takes raw data from the trend module and  generates a formatted report  The user can specify whether to record short term or long   term trend data  and the period for which the data should be recorded       Event Report    The recorder manager takes raw data from the event module and generates  a formatted event report  and this is recorded on the local recorder     e Alarm Recording       a local recorder is connected to the monitor via the optional serial  interface  you can make local alarm recordings  In configuration mode  you can select the  local recorder or the Information Center  or both  to record alarms  If one of the configured  alarms occurs  a recording for that alarm is started automatically at the local recorder  and   or requested form the Information Center      See Chapter 2  Installing the Instrument for more details on connecting to a recorder     A number of drawing fun
223. on Procedure                       aes eee 78    Contents ix    Installation of Wireless                                                                    78    Configuring the Radio Frequency of the M3 M4 Monitor                         78  Connecting to      ECG Output or Marker                                            87             the MONO 3544240        87   Selecting NBP Measurement                   15                                       87  Installing an Additional Display                                                90   BILL 90               2 52 ues             92            ashe Beh ve      bre iti Be va ocak atin ar ate Ee Ava el ain    92  Installing the 12V Adip   is de SEDE cond SU coe cem           vs 93  Using the Battery Charger and Conditioner                                       93  Connecting a Printers Su ee her SLE        cathe                  93   SCICCIING       gt              93  Installing the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector  M3080A    0  5                    94  Connecting    ded DUE RED Re d acuti a Re Ree Sep UR ed 95  Connecting    Remote                                                      ehh 96  Connecting Local Becor  et                                            ea      96  Site Preparation Guidelines        e RS d CN oes S dde 97       Solons s sau d Rep RR Reed pO                             SH        ees 98  Installing the Table Mount  M3080A    10                                       98  Installing the Universal Bed Han
224. on is an example of a typical invasive pressure wave     ABP       Introduction to the Instrument 37    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    Temp Mode    Measurement Range   1 to 45  C  30 to 113  F     Safety    To ensure the safety of the patient  the patient applied part is isolated from ground by opto   couplers and a transformer  The circuit is also encapsulated in plastic     Block Diagram    This illustration shows the block diagram of the Temp Press circuit     Excitation  Voltage                               E      Q  5  T      Transducer Y  E                  e  Ts To and from  cn            E  gt           System CPU   gt      Protection Ca     lt  gt   Network MD Co         Resistor  To and from Array  Current  Source    Temperature  Theory of Operation                 Sensor       The signals progress through the circuit as follows     Excitation Voltage    This supplies 5Vpc to a connected transducer  If a short circuit is detected by this circuit  the  CPU switches the voltage source off  to reduce power consumption      Input Protection Network  This provides protection for the rest of the circuit against defibrillator voltage  electrostatic    discharge  and any electromagnetic interference  The signal is passed on to the analog to  digital converter  and to the transducer detection circuit     38 Introduction to the Instrument    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    Transducer Detection    The tr
225. onnected     BATTERY MALFUNCTION     This is a severe INOP which indicates a malfunction of the  hardware or the battery  A severe INOP switches the main alarms suspended status back to  on  and generates an INOP alarm  If this alarm is silenced  it recurs after 3 minutes     NOTE If this INOP occurs after a new battery has been inserted  it may indicate the battery cannot    yet communicate because it is still too deeply discharged  In this case the message will  disappear after 5 to 10 minutes of charging     134 Maintaining the Instrument    Tutorial for Maintaining the Instrument    Tutorial for Maintaining the Instrument    Question 1  What is battery conditioning and how often must it be performed     a  Conditioning a battery refers to the complete discharge of a charged battery by  allowing it to die out while in non critical use  The empty battery may then be  recharged and put back into use  The battery used in the Instrument cannot be  conditioned  Discard it after use     b  Conditioning a battery refers to the complete discharge of a charged battery by  allowing it to die out while in non critical use  The empty battery may then be  recharged and put back into use  The rechargeable battery used in the Instrument  must be conditioned every 10 cycles to prepare it for further charge discharge  cycles     c  A rechargeable battery must be conditioned at regular intervals to prepare it for  further charge discharge cycles  Conditioning a battery refers to the complet
226. ous major sections of the software  As well  the operating system performs system  initialization  background error checking  and checking while the software is running         The Second Layer    This consists of the monitoring management system  This layer  includes the following software     Alarm software     Record software       Trend database software     Introduction to the Instrument 21    Functional Description of the Measurement Server Hardware      Heart rate software       The Third Layer    This consists of the interface management and interface controllers   This layer contains the date time  and Server to Monitor link managers       The Fourth Layer    This consists of the monitoring algorithms and software to acquire the  physiological signals     Functional Description of the Measurement Server  Hardware    The Server receives information signals  such as ECG  etc   from the patient  performs some  data processing  then transmits the data to the Monitor via the Server to Monitor link bar   The following block diagram shows the main functional components of the Measurement  Server                 Front End Board    6Vac  ECG Resp Front End CPU System    SO Floating    Patient 6Vac  CPU  Flash ROM  SpO  Front End Non Floating SRAM  DRAM   Isolation ASIC  RTC        6Vac  Press Temp Front End                   Serial Link  Link Bar                                                                      14Vac  lt  gt   From NBP DC DC       To From  Patient l Conver
227. p Press  measurement    Section 3 Measurement Server Extensions Description and Features      M3015A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation      Functional Description of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  Hardware        Sidestream CO2 Measurement    M3016A Measurement Server Extension Theory of Operation    e Functional Description of the M3016A Measurement Server Extension  Hardware    e Mainstream CO2 Measurement    Section 1   Monitor Description    The M3046A Patient Monitor is a small size  lightweight monitor with a TouchBar human  interface  The monitor has a color display with a wide viewing angle  and excellent visibility  from a distance  so that data can easily be recognized  For applications where a larger display  is required  an additional display can be connected to the monitor via the standard VGA  output     Trend data  and manual and automatic event storage  together with a range of report styles are  available for tracking and documenting the patient   s progress     The Monitor receives the processed data from the Measurement Server and the Measurement  Server Extension  examines it for alarm conditions  and displays it  The Monitor also  provides operating controls for the user  and interfaces to other devices     Introduction to the Instrument 11    Monitor Theory of Operation    Monitor Theory of Operation    The Monitor receives data passed from the patient through the Measurement Server and   where present  the Measurement Server Ext
228. pairing the Instrument      After fitting new tubes  go to Service Mode and reset the Backlight  Tube counter to zero     M3000A   M3001A    NBP Calibration and Performance tests    The preventative maintenance for the Non invasive blood pressure measurement consists of  the following tests       Accuracy Test    Leakage Test    Linearity Test    Valve Test    The tests are described in  Testing the Instrument   see also    NBP Accuracy  Leakage   Linearity and Valve Test  on page 146     Maintaining the Instrument 123    Preventive Maintenance Tasks    NOTE    124    M3015A    1  Allow 5 seconds between individual service procedures in order to ensure stable  equipment conditions    2  When certain Monitor procedures are running  for example  AutoZero or purging    service procedures are not possible and trying to start them will result in a message     Service Operation Failed  in the status line on the Monitor  Wait until the Monitor has  completed the current operation  then restart the service procedure     Preventive maintenance comprises the following activities     Perform visual inspection  see    Inspecting the Instrument  on page 122     Check the operating time for the pump and CO  scrubbers  Pump OpTime        If required   operating time  gt 15 000 hours   replace the pump and the        scrubber  units  with serial number prefix DE020xxxxx only   and reset the operating time counter       Perform barometric pressure check and calibrate  if necessary  see    Bar
229. pply the 5  Calibration Gas and wait until the value is stable    Step 4 Check the Noise Index        displayed next to the CO  value on      M3046A display     this indicates the level of noise on the CO  wave   If the value exceeds 3 mmHg the  M3015A unit must be replaced     CO  Gas Measurement Calibration Check    After switching the Measurement Extension on  wait at least 20 minutes before checking the  calibration   Check the calibration of the CO  Gas Measurement as follows     Step 1    Step 2    Step 3    Step 4    Step 5    Step 6    Step 7    Step 8    Step 9    Step 10    Check that the 5  calibration gas and flow regulator are connected   Calculate the expected measurement value in mmHg as follows     0 05 x  ambient pressure    value mmHg  e g  0 05 x 736   36 8 mmHg  with an ambient pressure of 736 mmHg     Open the valve on the flow regulator to allow 596 CO   gas to flow into the  Extension  Allow the value to stabilize     Check that the value on the instrument  measurement value on the Main Screen   x7   matches the calculated mmHg value   2 6 mmHg  If the value is outside the  tolerance  calibrate as described in Step 9 onwards    Disconnect the 5  calibration gas and connect the 10  calibration gas     Calculate the expected measurement value and tolerance in mmHg as follows     0 1 x  ambient pressure    value mmHg   0 07 x  value mmHg    tolerance    e g  0 1 x 737 mmHg   73 7 mmHg  with an ambient pressure of 737 mmHg    0 07 x 73 7 mmHg    5 16 mmHg t
230. r  soap and water  a diluted non caustic detergent or one of the cleaning agents listed in this  chapter  Universal Display Cleaner or window cleaner is recommended for the cleaning of  the LCD screen     Full cleaning instructions are given in the Instructions for Use     Cleaning Guidelines    To avoid damage to the Instrument  follow these cautionary guidelines     Maintaining the Instrument 125    General Cleaning of the Instrument    NOTE    126      Do NOT use any Povodine  Sagrotan  Mucocit cleaning agents or strong solvents  for  example  acetone or Kohrsolin     e Dilute cleaning agents   Most cleaning agents must be diluted before use  Always dilute  according to the manufacturer s instructions       Never use abrasive materials  such as steel wool or silver polish     Do not allow any liquid to enter the case  Never submerge any part of the Instrument     Do not pour liquid onto the Instrument during cleaning       Do not allow any cleaner to remain on any of the equipment surfaces  Wipe cleaners off  immediately     Cleaning Agents    Any solution categorized under the following generic products  apart from those listed in the  cautionary guidelines above  can be used as a cleaning agent       Dilute ammonia     Dilute formaldehyde 35 37       Hydrogen peroxide  3        Ethyl alcohol       sopropyl alcohol      Dilute sodium hypochlorite  laundry bleach      Concentrations ranging from approximately 500 ppm sodium hypochlorite  1 100 dilution of  household bleach
231. r about 1 second at power on  replace the System  Board      If the red LED switches on and remains on for more than 20 seconds  replace the System  Board      Use a known good link bar and connect a Defib  Defib cable and the Measurement Server  again  Check marker pulse again      Use a known good Measurement Server  Check marker pulse again       f both of the above fail  replace the System Board     If there is no ECG OUT signal to the Defib  repeat the above checks     Troubleshooting the Instrument 175    Part 1 Troubleshooting Checklists    Data Flow Marker In and ECG Wave    The following illustrates the data flow for Marker In and ECG Wave   Defib  lt     gt  Monitor  lt     gt  Measurement Server     ECG Wave        Marker       Display    Assembly       Monitor System Board        Marker In  Data Path    toe ECG Wave    Data Path        Marker merged to  ECG Wave here                                      Application    MEASUREMENT  SERVER    176 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    INOP Messages    The following table explains the technical INOP messages that the Monitor can issue  and  suggests a course of action  Where actions are numbered  always try them in the order given  and only proceed to the next action if the current one 1  not successful in solving the problem     BAD SERVER  LINK    You cannot use this  combination of Monitor   Measurement Server and   
232. r for at least  two hours       communi   cation may restart with   out further action  If the  message is still dis   played after this time   replace the battery    2  Change the System  Board   3  Change the Connec   tor Board     1  Change battery   2  Change the System  Board     1  Make sure nothing is  pressing on the keys or  the TouchStrip    2  Check that the Moni   tor Bezel is mounted  securely and for dam   age    3  Check the Monitor  Bezel assembly cables   4  Replace the Monitor  Bezel    5  Replace the System  Board     1  Make sure the Server  15 connected to the  Monitor or  if present   to the Extension    2  Replace the Server  with a known good  Server    3  Check link bar and  cables    4  Replace the System  Board        Troubleshooting the Instrument    MEASSERV  UNSUPPORTD    SERVERLINK              SPEAKER MAL   FUNCTION    UNSUPPORTED  LAN    CO  EQUIP MALF     M3015A and  M3016A     CO  NO TRANS     DUCER   M3016A     Troubleshooting the Instrument    Part 2 Isolating and Solving Instrument Problems    An incompatible Meas   urement Server  includ   ing any M3000A  15  connected to a Monitor  with Rev  E software     Either the current 1s too  high or the voltage 15  too low     Defective speaker or  cables     An unsupported device  has been connected to  LAN port of the Moni   tor     Malfunction in the           hardware or the  M1460A transducer  hardware     M1460A Transducer  not connected  Silenc   ing this INOP switches  the parameter off 
233. r r        NIE n                 Connect 4 pin Connect 9 pin female    male connector of connector of serial cable  2  serial cable to monitor   s to the socket on rear of    serial interface port recorder    Step 1 Connect the 9 pin female connector of the serial interface cable to the socket on the  rear of the recorder  Ensure that the DB9 connector is firmly fitted to the socket and  secure it by tightening the screw fasteners     Step 2 Connect the 4 pin male connector of the serial interface cable to the serial interface  port on the monitor marked with the  5      symbols     Installing the Instrument    Site Preparation Guidelines    Order the Roll Stand  M3080A Option  A30  or the Wall Mount  M3080A Option  A31  for  a dedicated mounting solution for your recorder  See    Mounting Options for the Local  Recorder    on page 111     The following recordings are supported     e Start Stop real time   e Start Extend delayed   e Alarm   e Vital signs   e Trends and stored events   The recordings always show the first three displayed wave forms  The height of the wave  channels is automatically adjusted according to the number of waves displayed     Number of Waves    Wave Channel    Channel 1  Channel 2 1 cm    Only Roman 8 characters are shown on the recorder  Monitor texts are sent to the local  recorder  printer or Information Center in English for monitors marketed in some East  European and Asiatic countries  Refer to the booklet    Translation Reference for M3 M4  P
234. racy  Leakage  Linearity and Valve Test    NBP Accuracy Test   This test checks the performance of the non invasive blood pressure parameter  The NBP  accuracy test is required once every two years and when the Instrument is repaired or when  Instrument parts are replaced    Connect the equipment as shown in the following     To NBPI  Expansion Chamber o NBP Input    C  gt  Tubing     gt  Manometer             Tools required      Reference manometer  includes hand pump and valve   accuracy 0 2  of reading    e Expansion chamber  volume 250 ml     10     Or alternatively  an NBP cuff can be used   When using a cuff  take care not to move it or touch it during the procedure as this can  cause the calibration to fail       Appropriate tubing    In Service Mode  the systolic and diastolic readings indicate the noise of NBP channels one   and two respectively  When static pressure 15 applied  the reading in NBP channel   should be   below 50  The value in parentheses indicates the actual pressure applied to the system     Step 1 Connect the manometer and the pump with tubing to the NBP connector on the  Measurement Server and to the expansion chamber     Step 2 Goto Service Mode     Step    Select the        setup     Testing the Instrument    Preventive Maintenance Tests    Step 4 Select    Close Valves  On    Step 5 Raise the pressure to 280 mmHg with the manometer pump   Step 6 Wait 10 seconds for the measurement to stabilize    Step 7 Compare the manometer values with the disp
235. red to as the cushion   The LCD display uses thin film technology and 1   sometimes referred to as a TFT display    The Display Assembly connects to the System Board via a 40 wire flat ribbon cable     Bezel Assembly   Comprising the U shaped TouchStrip  the Keyboard  which includes  operating keys  alarm LEDs  On Off switch and AC and battery indicator LEDs   and the  IrDA Board  infrared printer interface    recorder interface board     The Bezel Assembly connects to the System Board via a 34 wire flat ribbon cable     Speaker   Connected to the System Board with a 2 wire cable  The loudspeaker provides  the audible output for alarms  and audible feedback when the user presses a manual control     AC Power Supply   Connected to the Connector Board to power the Instrument and or  charge the battery depending on the operating mode     Smart Battery   As an option  a standard  intelligent battery with an I2C interface to the  DC DC controller     Wireless LAN Assembly     Comprising the Wireless LAN CPU Board and the radio  frequency  RF  Board  The Wireless LAN Assembly connects to the System Board via a  140 pin extension connector  The RF Board connects to the antenna  which is built into the  monitor handle via a coax cable       Ventilator Fan     Connected to the System Board with a 2 wire cable  The fan controls the  temperature inside the Monitor when the Wireless LAN option is installed     Detailed descriptions are given in the following sections     Display Video Co
236. rest are automatically  ignored     M3001A  C06     e Standard package plus Press and Temp     M3001A  C12       As standard package for M3 M4  Conventional 12 Lead ECG when used with IntelliVue     M3001A  C18         As standard package plus Press  Temp for M3 M4  Conventional 12 Lead ECG when used  with IntelliVue     M3000A Measurement Server Standard Package    The Measurement Server  M3000A  standard package includes     e Measurements of ECG Resp          and SpO  e Signal and alarm processing     M3000A  C06 Measurement Server Extended Measurements  Package    The Measurement Server  M3000A    06  optional package includes     e Measurements of ECG Resp          SpO    Press  and Temp   e Signal and alarm processing     Features    The Measurement Server has the following general features     Data Management    The Measurement Server features Patient Data Management  This consists of continuous 4   hour storage of patient related measurement information  This allows you to do the  following       Manage patient information       View patient data in tabular form via the Monitor   e Print patient information reports via the Monitor     Introduction to the Instrument    Measurement Server Theory of Operation      Transfer data between Monitors  The M3001A supports data transfer to and from the Intel   liVue family of patient monitors     Settings Transfer    The Measurement Server can be transported from one Monitor to another and still keep its  measurement settings  T
237. rial for Maintaining the Instrument                                         135  Answers to the Tutorial for Maintaining the                                             136  4 Testing the Instrument                  eere ertt tnn 137                               Beate ae 137        137                                  Re No                            138  Recommendations for Test                                                             139       ee 140  esting Oe      wr Dm 141                 142  P NO                              ah    un de neers d tcn i tino a                       142                   142  Power On Test  ue a           bees SQUE          Cae eS Sad 142  Functionality Assurance                                                         143  PertormaHce Assurance Test          abe wee bed LED S ERE E ER 143  OE is Sle Il GNC Che asa Sa ae ait a thee st ne sere gd wine saree is ee ae             143   Sy stent De        Ue      hah e eke eee t det ae Unc ce 144  System Sell Pest Ales  e ze ed sdb 54er b dated             145  Preventive Maintenance Tests                             146         Accuracy  Leakage  Linearity and Valve Test                             146  sidestream C O5 Perormance Lest a isa        rb       DEP 148  Checking and Resetting Time Counters                                      153  Documen  npg C O5 Test Resulls sae case ERA tae           ERA DOE WEE duae E 154  Accuracy and Performance                                           
238. rm relay is provided  which energizes  when an alarm condition occurs  This enables a remote alarm indicator  such as a Nurse Call   to be connected to the device     Battery Controller    The battery controller is the interface to the Smart battery  Signals from the battery inform the  battery controller of the most effective charging current with which to load the battery  Two  LEDs are mounted on the Battery Controller         Battery LED    This is illuminated green if the battery is fully charged and yellow if the  battery is charging  If the remaining battery operating time is only 5 minutes  the LED  flashes red at a repetition rate of 1 5 flashes per second       AC LED   This is illuminated green when the power cord is connected and AC power is  available  Otherwise it is extinguished  The AC LED is fed directly from the AC power    supply     For a detailed description of the battery  see chapter 3     Maintaining the Instrument      ECG Out Marker In Controller    The ECG Out Marker In Controller is the interface between the Monitor and any defibrillator  that might be connected  It converts a digital waveform signal received from the  Measurement Server ECG Respiration module into an analog ECG signal  which it feeds to  the defibrillator in order to synchronize it  The ECG Out controller also processes the marker  information from the defibrillator and feeds the data back to the Measurement Server ECG   Respiration measurement module     Introduction to the Instr
239. rve that there is a screen display and that no error codes are displayed     Step    If any error codes are displayed or the screen remains black  refer to   Troubleshooting the Instrument      The Instrument has a Self Test routine which generates and displays test waveforms and  corresponding numerics for the Measurement Server and or Measurement Server Extension  that is connected  The test signals are displayed for about 30 seconds and then the display  returns to monitoring mode     The test signal will display only if the system Self Test is successful and the Measurement  Server and  where present  the Measurement Server Extension is plugged into the Monitor   Perform the following quick system check to verify that the System Board and the  Measurement Server and  where present  the Measurement Server Extension are  communicating properly     Quick System Check    You can verify that the System Board in the Monitor and Measurement Server and  where  present  the Measurement Server Extension are communicating properly by completing the  following test     Testing the Instrument 143    Functionality Assurance Tests    The Test   Press the Setup button  move the highlight to ECG  and press on the TouchStrip     The Result   The ECG window should appear verifying that the System Board and  Measurement Server are communicating with each other     System Self Test    CAUTION The Self Test ensures that the Instrument is functioning correctly  it does not test the  accuracy of
240. rver Extension              252  Removine the Front COVSE           208 gs dp soe  96            252  Removing the Extension Bottom Cover                                      233  Removing the COs ScpUDDGE                                           235         the PMP aeu      wea                       ut osos                                   236  Refit Procedures for the M3015A Measurement Server Extension                    237  Retitting the CO  SCEUDDOE oes ioe ee sae eee aus      iuit dtes PA we 237  RMU the           he iins rie Sete eth us Ducted dh dt E ea ai 238  Refitting the Extension Bottom Cover                                       238           the Pron COVER                     Etc dra                     gt  oan es 238  Disassembly Procedures for      M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner             239  Openine the Houssine  Liven                    oto a oen Lo lot spetta    Lat ttr ea 230  Removing  the Coolmi  Pans   sic ier bbs a ha               d bad ed ew bred 240  Removing the  Ate Millers                        242  Reassembling the Battery Charger and                                                    242  Following Reassembly   22  3703 3 n Eu eR RS A ebd ook e RS RA ib E es 242  Tutorial for Repairing the Instrument                                           243  Answers to Tutorial for Repairing the                                                  244  1 Replacement           ts i           IHRER HIR RR        245     et deer                   
241. ry   b  Order only through the Sales channel  stating the serial number        Monitor Exchange Parts    12 Digit  Reordering Description  Number    Exchange Part  Number       M3046 68502 453563333331 Exchange Monitor System Board  English  software preloaded  Rel A      a  Use      M3 M4 Support Tool to configure the software for a specific release language  if necessary     Replacement Parts 251    Monitor Parts    Monitor Parts       252 Replacement Parts    Monitor Parts    Small Parts Kit                   _    M3046 64102 Small Parts Kit   includes   See illustration  on page 253     Qty Part number Description  4 5041 5125 Foot Bumper  Fits all Measurement Servers  and Server Extensions     4   3046 41001 Foot Bumper  1 5041 8116 Rubber key  1 5041 8118 Hook    3 0515 0886 Screw E    2 Pins for Battery Compartment Door T    1   3046 48102 IR window 5 o     D                  Small Parts Kit M3046 64102          Replacement Parts 253    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Multi Measurement Server Parts    The Multi Measurement Server  MMS  does not contain any servicable parts and can only be  replaced in its entirety     Multi Measurement Servers are shipped with English front bezels only  If you require a bezel  in another language  compare the part numbers of your language to the English ones to check    this  the front bezel has to be ordered additionally  Attach the appropriate bezel before putting  the MMS into operation     M3001A Part Numbers   Front Bezel    Lan
242. s    The tests described below are accessible in Service Mode only  In Service Mode press the  Setup key and select Hardware Test to display the Hardware Test selection menu     Coldstart Test    Before executing a coldstart test be aware that the patient database will be erased by the test  and that the Monitor defaults will be reset to user defaults     This coldstart test executes a reboot with a more intensive system Self Test than a normal  reboot  The coldstart test is also executed in the Server and in the Extension if either one is  connected   Executing the coldstart test automatically returns the Instrument to Monitoring Mode   To execute a coldstart test  do the following   Step 1   Switch the Monitor into Service Mode   Step 2 Press the Setup key   Step 3 Select Status Log   Step 4 Clear the Status Log and Confirm  for both  Monitor and Server    Step 5 Press Exit   Step 6 Select Hardware Test   Step 7 Select Coldstart   Step 8 Press Confirm   The Monitor  and Server  if connected  perform a reboot   The coldstart reboot is the same as described in What Happens During a Regular Boot  AC  powered  without Battery except that the time taken from the switch off of the Alarm and  Suspend LEDs to the switch on of the backlight and display of the M3 logo is extended  The    whole reboot takes about 10 seconds     After the system has come up again  check whether    CHECK STATUS LOG        15  displayed         If not  the test is successful     If yes  do the following 
243. s   IntelliVue Software Revision  A 05 xx and Lower    Language    Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number    Standard Version  5 Lead ECG  no Pressure Temp     us                       45356460091   MXLGMOi   453563460631 _    Option WEOE      ECG             _              N    56 Replacement Parts    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Language Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number    us                                                        453563460641        Option  C12  Functionality as Standard Version with M3 M4        Conventional 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue family only      Rus                                      001              453563460651 _    M3001 60701 453563460711 M3001 68701 453563460651    Replacement Parts 257    Multi Measurement Server Parts    Language Part Number   12 Digit Reordering   Exchange Part   12 Digit Reordering  Number Number Number  Option  C18  Functionality as  C06 with M3 M4   Conventional 12 Lead ECG with IntelliVue family only      Norwegian M3001  68801 453563460591  Korean M3001 60801 M3001  68801    a  All versions of the M3001A Measurement Server offer EASI lead placement using an EASI 5 electrode  cable set  The conventional 12 lead ECG capability of M3001A  C12 and  C18 only works with the  IntelliVue family of monitors  You can connect a 10 electrode lead set  for example  if a patient is  transferred from an IntelliVue
244. s for all field   replaceable components     The Measurement Server  the M3016A Measurement Server Extension and later versions   Revision B  of the M3015A Measurement Server Extension  with serial number prefix  DE020xxxxx  do not contain any serviceable parts  If defective  these pieces must be  returned to the factory     Compatibility Matrix   Release A to Release B    New hardware starts with serial date code DES850X XXX as well as with the serial date codes  in the range DE71305620 to DE73105823     Main System                   Metal Chassis  amp  Monitor  M3046 66502       Plastic Housing Bezel   exchange  M3046 66522 M3046 60002 M3046 60101 M3046     M3046  M3046 6410A 622YY  68502  M3046 44109    Main System  Board  M3046 68XXA    Connector Board                 amp  cover    M3046 66521  M3046 44107    Monitor  Power Supply  M3046 60001    Metal Chassis  amp   Plastic Housing  M3046 6410A    Monitor Bezel  M3046 622XX       Replacement Parts 245    Compatibility Matrix   Release A to Release       NOTE    246    Compatibilities and Incompatibilities    Old Main System Board   An old version Main System Board can be used with the new  Chassis and Housing  and the new Monitor Bezel  It cannot be used with the new Connector  Board  VGA  and cover or the new Power Supply  This part will remain available for  replacement use in existing Monitors     New Main System Board   A new Main System Board can be used with all old parts except  the old Power Supply  If an old Mai
245. sassembly Procedures  221   Display Assembly related problems  186   188   Display Test  207   disposal  115    E    earthing  64  EASI lead placements  23  ECG  data out  67  EASI  23  signal  analog  67  ECG EQUIP MALF message  210  ECG Sync  Performance Test  158  ECG synch  158  ECG Resp  Performance check  155  theory of operation  23  Electrocardiogram Respiration  SP  Module  Block Diagram  25  Components  25  Description  23  Features  24  ECG Modes  24  RESP Modes  24  Safety  25  Measurements  23  Theory of Operation  25  electrosurgery protection  64  equipment  combining  65  equipotential grounding post  5  Error Code Description  198  Error Codes  197  listing  199  explosive gases  66  extensions  1V     ECG RE     F    floating inputs  Type CF   64   Front Panel LEDs  troubleshooting  168   fuse  221   fuse  part number  250    G    gases  explosive  66   grounding  64  cabinet  64   grounding post  5    H    heart examination  65  Human Interface Controller  18    275    Infrared Lamp  replacement  125  INOP Messages  177  inputs  floating  64  Inspect the Cables and Cords  122  Inspect the System  122  installation  iv  cabinet  66  Installing the Instrument  63  Instrument Components  4  intra aortic balloon pump  67  Isolating and Solving  Problems  177  Isolating problems to the  subassembly  175    Instrument    correct    L    label  numeric  10  wave  10  leakage current  patient  64  LED  AC Power  5  battery  5  LEDs  System Board  169  Line Frequenc
246. serial bi directional  data communication link to the pressure temperature modules of the system CPU     The following data is transmitted to the system CPU     Pressure wave     Temperature numeric     INOP and error messages   e Status messages   The following data is received from the CPU       Control messages         messages in both directions are secured by checksums     ADC Controller and Data Acquisition  The data exchange between the A D converter and the CPU is based on    serial    communication link  The calibration information is periodically refreshed to ensure proper  operation of the converter  The converter generates an interrupt each time new data is    40 Introduction to the Instrument    Temperature and Invasive Blood Pressure  Temp Press  measurement    available  This forces the CPU to retrieve the data and to calculate the scaled pressure  waveform of temperature value     Wave Processing and Filtering    Pressure measurement  Data from the A D converter is sent to a single pole digital filter  which generates the specified frequency response  Additionally  the transducer zero value is  subtracted from the signal    Temperature measurement  This is referenced against a high precision calibration resistor   Each temperature value consists of 16 averaged samples and the test resistor verifies the  linearity of the measurement  With an offset resistor all offsets are eliminated     Pressure  amp  Temperature Mode Detector    The CPU switches between two d
247. serial numbers for the Monitor and the Measurement Server can be seen in the    Revisions     window  press Setup key then select    Revisions         However  if a Measurement Server  Extension  M3015A or M3016A  is in use  the number will not appear and must be noted  down from the back of the Extension  To do this  remove the Measurement Server and  Extension from the Monitor  so that the back of the extension is visible     The Status Log and Error Codes    One possible line of fault isolation is in the error codes  However  some error codes cannot  provide diagnostic information at the repair site and must be analyzed in the factory if they  appear repeatedly  Whenever one of the subsystems is unable to perform an operation  an   error code is generated  Error codes are assigned to fatal and non fatal errors     Error codes can be found in the Status Log while in the operating modes  In the  Configuration  Demonstration  and Monitoring modes  the Status Log only displays fatal  error codes  In the Service Mode  the Status Log displays both fatal and non fatal error codes  with a blank line separating the two     Errors that occur during start up or regular monitoring are logged in the Status Log  The  Status Log can be printed and cleared  If fatal errors occur repeatedly  send a printout of the  Status Log  Service Mode  to Philips     There are two categories of error     Fatal Errors   These errors indicate major problems that cause the Monitor to reset and re   start
248. sh ones to check this   the front bezel has to be ordered additionally  Attach the  appropriate bezel before putting the M3016A into operation     M3016A Parts    12 Digit    Reordering Description  Number       M3016A  A01  Press Temp with Mainstream CO      M3016 44131    M3016 44133  M3016 44134  M3016 44135  M3016 44136  M3016 44137  M3016 44138  M3016 44139  M3016 44140  M3016 44144  M3016 44145  M3016 44147  M3016 44150    M3016A Front Bezel  English  also for French  Danish   Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese    M3016A Front Bezel  German   M3016A Front Bezel  Dutch   M3016A Front Bezel  Spanish   M3016A Front Bezel  Italian   M3016A Front Bezel  Norwegian   M3016A Front Bezel  Swedish   M3016A Front Bezel  Finnish   M3016A Front Bezel  Japanese   M3016A Front Bezel  Portuguese   M3016A Front Bezel  Greek   M3016A Front Bezel  Russian   M3016A Front Bezel  Polish    M3016A  A02  Press Temp without Mainstream CO      NA    M3016 44161    M3016 44162  M3016 44163  M3016 44164  M3016 44165  M3016 44166  M3016 44167  M3016 44168  M3016 44169  M3016 44170    2          je            3      5  ct   0  je     d          70    M3016A Front Bezel  English  also for French  Danish   Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese    M3016A Front Bezel  German   M3016A Front Bezel  Dutch   M3016A Front Bezel  Spanish   M3016A Front Bezel  Italian   M3016A Front Bezel  Norwegian   M3016A Front Bezel  Swedish   M3016A Front Bezel  Finnish   M3016A Front Bezel  Japanese   M3016A
249. sion has a sidestream carbon dioxide respiratory gas  measurement for the Monitor monitoring device  It is designed to be used with the M3000A   M3001A Measurement Server for adult  pediatric  or neonatal patients  in a hospital  environment and during patient transport in and outside hospitals by clinical users  The  patients can be intubated or non intubated     CO  respiratory gas measurements indicate the efficiency of the transfer of oxygen from  2 resp ys y yg  alveolar air into pulmonary capillary blood and the elimination of carbon dioxide from  pulmonary capillary blood and its transfer into alveolar air   CO  respiratory gas measurements are evaluated as gas passes through the airway adapter on  the patient s intubation system  CO   respiratory gas measurements are an indication of the        2 resp    5  patient   s overall respiratory status     Blood Gas concepts important to this section are     e Airway Respiration Rate  AwRR    The number of inspirations and expirations per    minute      End Tidal CO   EtCO     The highest partial pressure of        measured during one expi   ration      Inspired Minimum CO   ImCO     The lowest partial pressure of        during inspira   tion       Instantaneous CO     The CO  measurement at any instant     Ventilation   The movement of air in and out of the lungs by inspiration and expiration     Measurements    The sidestream        measurement produces respiratory CO   gas readings in a real time CO   waveform together wi
250. splayed in the status line at the bottom of the  screen is the same as the value which you selected from the list in step 5     Leakage Check    The leakage check consists of two parts       Check of tubing between the pump outlet and the M3015A outlet       Check of tubing between the pump inlet and FilterLine inlet     Check the User s Guide of the flowmeter for details on how to make a correct flow reading     Part 1  Step 1  Step 2    Step 3    Step 4    Step 5    Step 6    Step 7    Part 2    Step 8    Step 9    Go into Service Mode and highlight          Connect a FilterLine to the sidestream CO  input to start the pump running     Check the ambient and cell pressure shown in the status line on the screen  The cell  pressure should be approximately 20 mmHg lower than ambient pressure     Connect the flowmeter outlet to the FilterLine inlet using a flexible connecting tube   Block the M3015A outlet using your fingertip and observe the flowmeter display   The value on the flowmeter  x2  should decrease to between 0 and 4 ml min   accompanied by an audible increase in pump noise  If the value is within the    tolerance limits  continue with Part 2 of the leakage check     If the value is outside the tolerance limits  there is a leakage between the pump  outlet and the M3015A gas outlet     Open the M3015A and check the tubing connections at the pump outlet and the    M3015A gas outlet  If the connections are good  then there is a leakage in the tubing  and the M3015A must 
251. ss Bedside Parameters window     Wireless Bedside Configuration    OF x   Tool expects   RengeLAN  Bed  1 2 B15  cart    Configure    Clear Fields      Modify values as needed  ar use  Clear Fields      Domain        security 10   m3150            Status         Step 15 Modify the    domain    field according to your design requirements  Refer to  Appendix A of the M3185A IntelliVue Clinical Network Service Manual for the  appropriate wireless configuration worksheets     Security ID  Keep the default entry m3150     If an error message appears  see Troubleshooting in the Access Point section     This configuration process takes about 1 minute  During configuration  status messages will  be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Wireless Bedside Parameters window as the  tool resets the configuration to factory default values  sets the configuration parameters  and  then resets the Wireless Adapter     When the tool has successfully completed the configuration  the Wireless Bedside  Configuration is completed successfully window is displayed     ConfigT ool         IN Wireless Bedside Configuration is completed successfully     Do vou want to save Logs to file   A  toalssConfigT ool BedO0  log 7     Click Cancel to specify a different file                                       The configuration tool will write the configuration dialog and summary information to a file  if you wish  It will create a Log file name by combining Bed and the 2 digits of the Domain  entered in
252. strument and the other end is  connected to one point of the equipotential grounding system     Examinations in or on the heart  or brain  should only be carried out in medically used rooms  incorporating an equipotential grounding system  according to national standards     Combining Equipment         combinations of medical equipment with non medical equipment must comply with IEC  60601 1 1     If instruments are combined  the summation of the leakage currents can be hazardous  to the patient or hospital personnel     If it is not evident from the Instrument specifications whether a particular instrument  combination is hazardous or not  service personnel must apply measurements and  install appropriate IEC 60601 1 compliant means to make sure the combination is safe   see Chapter 4     Testing the Instrument    In a likely case  the user must consult the  manufacturers to ensure that the summation of leakage currents does not jeopardize  patient safety     Installing the Instrument 65    Preparing to Install the Monitor    WARNING    66    Apart from the possible danger caused by leakage currents  no other hazards are known to  result from the simultaneous use of the Monitor with other patient connected equipment     Environment    To ensure a completely safe electrical installation  follow the instructions described later in     Installing the Monitor     The environment where the system will be used should be  reasonably free from vibration  dust  corrosive or explosive
253. t     d  All of the above examples are correct     Question 2  When organising power supply for monitoring equipment  which of the  following does not contribute to patient safety     a  Do not touch the patient when connecting or disconnecting a cable to a Video Out  connector     b  It is important to read and become familiar with the    Monitor and Measurement  Server Specifications  chapter in the  nstructions for Use     c  When connected to an AC power supply  either mains or vehicle   the cabinet of  the monitor must be grounded     d  If other patient connected equipment is used simultaneous to the Monitor  the  summation of leakage currents can be hazardous to the patient or to hospital  personnel     e  All of the above examples are correct     Question 3  How can you eliminate potential differences between different pieces of  equipment  for internal examinations on the heart or on the brain   a  Do not mount monitoring equipment over the patient   s bed     b  Connect the Monitor by a separate connection to the equipotential grounding  system of the medically used room     c  The Instrument must be kept clear of condensation     d  There is nothing in particular that needs to be done     116 Installing the Instrument    Answers to the Tutorial for Installing the Instrument    Answers to the Tutorial for Installing the Instrument    1  b   See page 100 for more details    2  e   See entire chapter for more details      3  b   See page 65 for more details      Insta
254. t    The main window appears as shown below                AN  Site Survey  amp  Configuration Tool      OR XI    Checking for HangeL MZ driver       HangeLAMZ diver version SA 1 3 B5 accessed successtullu     Made address  002026352942        version  V1  8ET 20   Synchronized to 0020  635284   MASTER                         Help    Configuration    E xit      E  ELEM aci    Site Survey          1  The recommended Site Survey Tool is available from Connectronics  www connectronics com   The part  number is 82 6332 7402 05  Range LAN2 PCMCIA Card  One piece with Snap on antenna      204 Troubleshooting the Instrument    Testing Wireless Network Connectivity    Procedure    1 Click on the Site Survey button in the main window to bring up the Site Survey window   which appears as shown below        BL Surrey       In this example  the Node Address shows one unit  this 15 the MAC address of the radio  board 0020a6338fdb  with a Received Signal Strength of 90   The number to the right of the  bar graph is the indicator     Acceptance Criteria     The RSSI should be greater than 80   If it is less than 80   check the antenna cable  connection to the Radio board inside the M3046A to see that it is mated properly     When the test is completed  click on Done inthe Site Survey window  then on Exit  inthe RangeLAN2 Site Survey and Configuration Tool window     Troubleshooting the Instrument 205    Using Service Mode    CAUTION    206    Using Service Mode    Service Mode Hardware Test
255. t   Discharge   Transfer  ADT  Software Module                           13  Trend  Sottware Mod  le 93 ier ore                    ae oe oe eRe eho CRUS ra SERA 13  Events Soltware                    aeta nat        108 ROS ndr e EE          13  Printer Mana CCE                edo oos  Soler d y eod Soe at aS a              feeit en 14  Recorder Manager                      EX Rb E Rao ond 14  IrDA Serial Communication Manager                                        15  Communication Software Module                                           15  SUPPO           BESSER NER dau nd                15  Functional Description of the Monitor Hardware                                   16  Display Video CoOlFOllet     17  Human Interlace Controller                      Seb d d qp 18  Battery    18  ECG OuuMarker In Controller             18  Infrared  IL DA   Dnterideeu oa us ead oir do e                 CIR S E SE 19                    cha Qa cce dur       ee ee eeu eek wae 19  Wireless                    9                                19  Section 2   Measurement Server Description and             5                           19  M3001A Measurement Server Standard Package                               19  M3001A Measurement Server Extended Measurements Packages                  20    Contents Vii    viii    M3000A Measurement Server Standard Package                               20    M3000A  C06 Measurement Server Extended Measurements Package              20                         
256. t be conditioned at regular intervals to prepare it   Conditioning for further charge discharge cycles  Conditioning a battery refers to the  complete discharge of a charged battery by allowing it to die out while in  non critical use  The empty battery may then be recharged and put back into  use     Maintaining the Instrument 119    Recommendations for Maintenance Frequency    Recommendations for Maintenance Frequency    The maintenance checklist appears in the next section of this chapter  The listed procedures  should be performed as indicated in the Suggested Maintenance Timetable below  The  checklist may be photocopied and should be completed by the maintainer  It should be filed  for future reference  The owner of the equipment is responsible for the performance of the  maintenance activities in line with the schedule below     Suggested Maintenance Timetable    Inspect the Instrument  and inspect the Daily   cables and cords for the entire Instrument     Preventive Maintenance for the M3046A   Monitor   e Cleaning procedures  Clean as needed    e Testing Procedures See  Testing the Instrument        Preventive Maintenance for the M3000A    M3001A Measurement Server   e Cleaning procedures  Clean as needed    e Non invasive Blood Pressure Cali  Once every two years   bration test   e Testing procedures  See  Testing the Instrument        Preventive Maintenance for the M3015A  Measurement Server Extension    e Cleaning procedures  Clean as needed   e Replace pump and  
257. ter 48y    Monitor  _    Pneumatic           1     Assembly           Pneumatic        12  12V Power Switches                            AD       Converters       LEN CU E               l    The main functional areas are summarized below     e CPU Board   Consisting of a 68360 Controller  the Memory System  Flash ROM  SRAM   DRAM  ASIC          etc    the NBP A D Converters  and a connector link to a Monitor or  an Extension     22 Introduction to the Instrument    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement    e Front End Board   Consisting of the ECG Resp Front End  the SpO  Front End  the Press   Temp Front End and the Floating Non Floating Isolation area all feeding signals to the  CPU Board       NBP Pneumatic Assembly   Connecting to the DC DC Converter Board  the Pneumatic  Power Switches housed    the DC DC Converter Board and to the NBP A D Converters       DC DC Converter Board   Connecting to the Floating Non Floating Isolation area on the  Front End Board  to the NBP Pneumatic Assembly and to the CPU System     Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp   Measurement    Description    The Measurement Server has a three channel electrocardiogram and respiration  measurement  It is designed to be used with adult  neonatal  or pediatric patients in ICU and  OR environments     Measurements    The ECG Resp measurement produces continuous real time waves for both cardiac and  pulmonary activity  It also generates numerics for the average heart rate  HR   derived 
258. tery  use  see the    Using Your Monitor in Patient Transport    chapter in the Instructions for Use     Connecting a Printer    Selecting a Printer  If you are printing locally  you can use either of the following accessories     e    PCL 3      PCL 5 compatible printer  with an infrared to parallel converter  J etEye    Printer wireless infrared connector   which you can order as M3080A Option      5  or    a PCL3 or PCL 5 compatible with a built in infrared interface   You can also use the LaserJet with the JetEye  but then you will also need a Centronics  printer extension cable   Installing the wireless infrared printer connector is covered on  page 94      Make sure that the infrared printer port is at least 50cm  20 inches  from any SpO  transducer  while you are printing  to avoid disturbing the SpO  measurement     Note that the M3 Print Server is no longer available  but is mentioned here for those who still  use it     Step 1 Press the Setup key    Step 2 Move the highlight to Printer    Step 3 Press      the strip to select the Printer window    Step 4 Move the highlight to Printer    Step 5 Press on the strip    Step 6 Select the appropriate setting according to the following table     None    there is no printer       printing operations are disabled     Installing the Instrument 93    Installing the Wireless Infrared Printer Connector  M3080A      5     94    Local o enable a local printer    Remote  1 o enable a printer connected through the network      Remot
259. th numerics for End tidal CO   EtCO     Airway Respiration Rate   AwRR   and Inspired Minimum Carbon Dioxide  ImCO       Factors affecting accurate measurement of sidestream CO  respiratory gas are as follows       Proper connection between the Extension and      patient s respiratory system     Temperature of the patient s breath      Amount of water vapour in the patient s breath      Barometric pressure at the site of measurement acquisition      Other gases  most notably N5O and       in the gas mixture     The          End Tidal Carbon Dioxide  measurement for Carbon Dioxide uses a technique  based on the absorption of infrared radiation by certain gases     Infrared light is absorbed by CO    The amount of absorption varies according to the CO     concentration in the gas mixture  By using an infrared detector to measure the absorption  the  CO   concentration in a gas can be derived     Introduction to the Instrument    Sidestream        Measurement    Sidestream CO  Features    This illustration shows the user controls on the Server and the connector for appropriate  tubing for the sidestream CO  measurement on the Extension                                        sidestream CO     tubing        Sidestream CO  Wave  The two calibration marks are located at 10  and 60  of wave channel height  The lower    calibration mark is labelled 0 mmHg  0 0 kPa  on all scales  The upper one is adjustable from  20 mmHg  2kPa  to 100 mmHg  13 kPa  in steps of 10 mmHg  1            CO
260. the Monitor to    GCX Wall Channel but to also provide tilt and  swivel capability     Step 1  Step 2  Step 3  Step 4  Step 5    Step 6    Rail       Unpack the Tilt Swivel mount and check all parts are available    Make sure the wall channel end stop has been fitted    Secure the rail to the Tilt Swivel mount with the 2 screws provided    Slide the adapter plate down the wall channel    Adjust the assembly to the correct height with the adjustable channel stop     Use adjustment knobs to adjust to the required tilt swivel angle     Hang the bed hanger over the rail     Installing the Instrument    103    Installing the Tilt Swivel Mount  M3080A  A14     Attached to a Universal Pole Clamp    This option is used to attach the Tilt Swivel mount to a Universal Pole clamp  The Monitor  can then be mounted on a pole or rail and can provide tilt and swivel capability     Step 1  Step 2  Step 3    Step 4    Step 5  Step 6  Step 7    Step 8       Unpack the Tilt Swivel mount and check all parts are available   Remove the adapter plate  this is only necessary for the GCX Wall Channel    Secure the rail to the Tilt Swivel mount with the 2 screws provided     Decide whether the tilt swivel mounting 1  to be secured for vertical positioning  on  a pole  or for horizontal positioning  on a rail      Secure the pole clamp to the tilt swivel mounting with the two screws provided   Tighten the screws   Attach the clamp to a pole or rail     Use adjustment knobs to adjust to the required tilt
261. the monitor itself and one for the  Wireless Adapter card that transmits data to the Access Point  The M3 M4 monitor IP  Address is set dynamically by the Information or Surveillance Center displaying its    monitoring data  This procedure describes how to configure the Wireless Adapter card and  set its IP Address     Installing the Instrument    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure  The following cable is required to interconnect the configuring PC to the Wireless LAN  adapter in the M3 M4 patient monitor       9 pin D female   1 8 in  male stereo phono cable  PN M1360 61675     Copying the Configuration Tools to the Configuring PC    The first step in the procedure is to copy the configuration tool software from the IntelliVue  Information Center Application Software CD ROM to the configuring PC     Step 1 Turn on the configuring PC to display the Windows Main Menu     Step2 Insert the IntelliVue Information Center Application Software CD ROM  into the CD ROM drive of the configuring PC   Step 3 Open Windows Explorer as follows     a  Click on Start in the lower left of the Windows Main Menu to open the  Windows Workstation menu     b Click Programs to display the Programs menu   c  Click Windows Explorer to display folders in the PCs CD ROM drive     Find the Viridia directory on the CD ROM shown in the figure below and click on  it to display the tools directory     21 2  990208 1245  F                     sw cisco1900 9 00 04 V1 2 CFG       41 Viridia    Hg ansfiles 
262. the service record   V P or V        where P pass  i e  the system has no obvious signs of damage  and F fail    Power On Test    Step 1 Switch on the monitor and connect the Measurement Server to the M3046A    Step 2 Observe whether the monitor boots up successfully without displaying an error code  and if an ECG wave appears on the screen     What to record on the service record     Testing the Instrument    Functionality Assurance Tests    PO P or PO F    where P pass  1 e  the monitor boots up displaying no error codes and displays an ECG wave  and F fail    Functionality Assurance Tests    The following functionality assurance checks are recommended to verify proper operation  daily before the Instrument is used to Monitor a patient     Functionality assurance checks fall into two parts   1 Verification of overall operation by completing the Performance Assurance Test     2 Verification of the Measurement Server and  where present  the Measurement Server  Extension operation by completing the System Check and the System Self Test     You can perform these checks in any order you choose  They are divided up here for  organizational purposes     Performance Assurance Test  To verify your Instrument works properly  perform the following test     Step 1 Connect the power cord to the Monitor and plug it into an AC power source  Switch  the Monitor on by pressing the ON OFF button     Step 2 After approximately one minute  the Monitor should complete its boot up process   Obse
263. tives    In order to meet this chapter   s goals  you should be able to complete the installation of the  Monitor with a Server and an Extension including all of the following tasks       Install the Instrument      Configure the hardware      Perform post installation checks     Connect a printer      Connect a local recorder      Comply with safety requirements     As well  you should be able to perform site preparation and assemble any of the following  mounting options       Table Mount      Universal Bed Hanger      Wall Rail        Tilt Swivel Mount      Universal Pole Clamp      Measurement Server Mounting Plate      nfrared Printer Connector     The appropriate installation procedures are described in this chapter     Concepts    The following section contains information that you need to understand before attempting an  installation of an M3046A Monitor  an M3000A M3001A Measurement Server and  where  present  M3015A M3016A Measurement Server Extensions     Instrument The detachable three wire power cable grounds the Instrument to the power   Grounding line ground when plugged into an appropriate three wire receptacle  This  cable protects both the patient and the hospital staff  Do not use any other  power cable     Line Voltage  Switch mode power supply automatically selects the necessary line voltage  Selection for the system     Mounting Sur  The mounting surface frequently dictates the type of screw to be used when   face Analysis mounting the equipment  Ability
264. trument Problems    Display waves Radio frequency interfer    Turn off or move away  are noisy not ence  RFI  from other from the Monitor the  showing a instruments such as ultra    instrument causing RFI  smooth QRS sound  ESU  Defib  or problems   wave  telemetry is causing noisy   waveforms     Message The display has been Use the Upgrade Tool to   appears  New exchanged and the Moni    upgrade the monitor with  display tor needs the new specifi    the latest display specifi   detected  please   cations  cations    enter new dis    play specs       TouchStrip related problems    TouchStrip dis    Cleaning agents  abrasive   Replace the Monitor  colored  cracked   material  or strong sol  Bezel and clean the Instru   or surface 1s vents were used to clean ment in the future with  deformed  the Instrument  only isopropyl alcohol   Wipe cleaning agents off  surfaces immediately     Lack of user Cable from the System Refit cable correctly   control of dis  Board to the Monitor  play  Bezel not connected prop    erly     Check Status Log for mes   Defective TouchStrip  sage  CHECK INPUT  DEVICE    Replace the System  Defective System Board    Board     Network related problems            Central Wrong monitor label or Check the bed assign    assigned to this   Information Center incor    ments at the Information   bed  prompt rectly configured Center and that the moni    message tor label assigned to this  monitor has not been  changed locally       Troubleshooting the Instrume
265. ts    Measurements    Compatible with  which M3046A    Release     D and  lower       Measurement  Server Server    Extension    c  9      e      5  49  d      ithOption 5  60   gt   x        EASI derived   12 Lead ECG  Respiration  Non Invasive  Blood Pressure  SpO    Invasive   Blood Pressure       M3001A  C06     lt    lt    lt     M3001A  C12     lt                                       ES    M3001A    18    M3016A  A02              supported      not supported    a  Using a standard 5 electrode lead set  You can connect    10 electrode lead set  for example  if a patient is  transferred from an IntelliVue monitor   but only the standard five electrodes  RA  LA  RL  LL  and V  are  used for monitoring  The rest are automatically ignored    b  Only Pressure Temperature supported in M4 monitors    c  Support for the CO  measurement depends on the monitor option and software revision  Compatible with M3      lt    lt   ES    S    SS NL PS      lt     S    M4 with software revision E and D  later than D 11   Compatible with M4 only with software revision B to  D 11  No support for CO   for earlier monitors with software revision A     The signals are converted into digital data  and processed before being communicated to the  Monitor  The server device is referred to as the Measurement Server or simply the Server in  this manual       versions of the M3000A and M3001A Measurement Servers are covered by  this manual     When using the M3015A and M3016A  all the signals are con
266. ts with serial number prefix  DEO20xxxxx only      Performance and Safety Tests Once every two years   Temperature Accuracy  ECG Resp Performance  Invasive Pressure Performance  SpO  Performance    Mainstream CO   Performance    Nurse Call Relay Performance  ECG Sync Performance    including Safety Checks  in Once every two years   accordance with IEC 60601 1   e System Enclosure Leakage   Current   Protective Earth   Patient Leakage Current       Testing the Instrument 139    Test           Test           The test map shows which tests are required in which situations     Service Event Test Blocks Required   When performing     Complete these tests     Installation of M3 M4 with no display Perform Visual and Power On test  connected to the VGA output blocks    Installation of M3 M4 with a display Perform Visual  Power On and    connected to the VGA output Safety  1  test blocks    Installation of M3 M4 with a recorder Perform Visual  Power On and  connected to the serial interface Safety  1  test blocks  Perform test  print on recorder     Repairs where the power supply in the M3    Perform Power On and Safety  2   M4 is replaced Test blocks    Repairs where the monitor has been Perform Power On and Safety  2   dropped and  3  Test blocks    All other M3046A repairs  Hardware or Perform Power On test block  Software Upgrades    Preventative Maintenance Perform all Preventative  Maintenance Tests    Safety and Performance Perform all Safety and Performance  Test blocks       
267. two years and when the Instrument is repaired or when Instrument  parts are replaced     Temperature Accuracy    This test checks the performance of the temperature parameter  The temperature accuracy test  is required once every two years     Tools required  Patient simulator  with 0 1  C or 0 2  F     Step 1 Connect the patient simulator to the temperature connector on the Measurement  Server or Measurement Server Extension     Step 2 Configure the patient simulator to 40   C or alternatively 100   F  Step3 The value should be 40        0 2   C or 100   F   0 4   F     If the displayed value is not within the tolerances given above  refer to  Troubleshooting the  Instrument      ECG Resp Performance    This test checks the performance of the ECG and respiration parameters  ECG Resp  performance test is required once every two years     Tools required  Patient Simulator     ECG Performance    Step 1 Connect the Patient Simulator to the ECG Resp connector on the Measurement  Server     Step 2 Configure the Patient Simulator as follows         ECG sinus rhythm              100 bpm    Step 3 Check the displayed ECG wave and HR value against the simulator configuration     Step 4 The value should be 100bpm     2bpm     Testing the Instrument 155    Accuracy and Performance Procedures    NOTE    156    Respiration Performance    Step 5    Step 6    Change the Patient Simulator configuration to       Base impedance line 1500 Ohm       Delta impedance 0 5 Ohm        Respiration rat
268. uch as gain  A D sampling rate  and DAC  operation     Acquires the digitized ECG and Resp signals  Digitized ECG signals are used to  calculate 3 ECG leads which are then passed on to the Pace Pulse detecting software  and  the wave processing and filtering software     Performs ECG wave filtering  The waves are digitally filtered and scaled then passed to  the software that communicates with the system CPU     Performs pace pulse detection  A digital high pass filter acts as a slope detector for the  received ECG waves  The output of the slope detector is fed into two comparators  comparing the signal to a positive and negative threshold  The output of the comparators  indicate the absence or presence of a pace pulse  The threshold of the comparators is  moving and adapts itself to the amount of noise present in the ECG wave  Detected pace  pulses are communicated to the wave processing and filtering software       Communicates with the system CPU  Communication is via a serial  bi directional data  link  The ECG Resp CPU sends the following data to the system CPU       3 ECG waves     Introduction to the Instrument    Electrocardiogram Respiration  ECG Resp  Measurement         respiration wave      Pace pulse data      INOP messages  and    Status messages     The ECG Resp CPU receives control messages from the system CPU     ECG Software on the System CPU          Display Filter     ECG Wave   amp  Scaling              Heart Rate    Cardiotach    Ds    gt  ECG Alarming  
269. ulling the Connector Board out  The    Plastic Housing must be completely removed to allow the Connector Board to be  unscrewed from the side of the Monitor        228 Repairing the Instrument    Disassembly for the Monitor    Removing the Speaker   To remove the speaker  do the following    Step 1 Remove the chassis as described previously in this chapter   Step 2 Remove the Power Supply    Step 3 Remove the Connector Board    Step 4 Disconnect the speaker cable running to the System Board   Step 5 Rotate the two plastic holders retaining the speaker     Step 6 Remove the speaker     Repairing the Instrument 229    Refit Procedures for the Monitor    NOTE    230    Refit Procedures for the Monitor    Refitting the System Board   To refit the System Board  complete the steps for removing the System Board in reverse    When refitting the System Board please observe the following      Be careful not to strike the metal chassis with parts      Make sure the speaker cable is not trapped when the System Board is inserted      Wait until the System Board is in place before positioning the screws  otherwise they may  fall out when you do the next step    e Slightly raise the end of the System Board and push down and forward to engage the retain   ing clips on the chassis       Make sure the bottom edge of the System Board sits correctly in the clips to give a good  electrical contact     _    System Board    Cli  Stop    Refitting the LCD Assembly and Backlight Tubes    To refit the
270. ument    Section 2   Measurement Server Description and Features    Infrared  IrDA  Interface    The IrDA interface provides a wireless interface to an external printer  This interface  functions in the same way as a normal serial interface except that a modulated infrared beam  is used to exchange data and status information instead of a wire connection  Both the  Monitor and some printers are equipped with infrared transmitter receiver units     When using a printer without a built in infrared interface  an infrared to parallel converter   Jet Eye  orderable under M3080A Option      5  is needed  See the Instructions for Use   Installation chapter  for details on how to connect the printer using this converter     Serial Interface    The serial interface allows a local recorder to be connected to the Monitor using a serial cable  that supports the GSI Lumonics XE 50p Chart Recorder specific protocol     Wireless LAN Interface    The Wireless LAN interface provides a wireless connection to the Philips LAN  The Wireless  LAN CPU connects to the wired LAN inside the Monitor and provides the software drivers  for the RF Board  The RF Board transforms wired LAN signals into 2 4 GHz signals for  transmission  The modulation technique FHSS  frequency hopping spread spectrum  ensures  optimum transmission performance     The 2 4 GHz band is available worldwide for industrial  scientific and medical purposes  and  is called the ISM band     Section 2   Measurement Server Description
271. unting plate      The installation procedure is the same for both connector boxes  This means you must    perform steps 3 to 8 of this procedure twice     The connectors on each box are different  so you must ensure that the correct box is placed at  the correct location  The symbol on the plastic angled cover indicates at which site you  should install the box    Symbol     is connector box  in  and must be placed at the monitor site     Symbol  ub is connector box  out  and must be placed at the measurement server site     The correct connector cable  M3081 61601  M3081 61602 or M3081 61603  has the  opposite symbol     Connector Box  in  Cable Connector Box  out                Symbols on Cable  At Monitor Site Connector At Measurement Server Site       If there are no symbols on the cover  dots are used           lt       and       lt        Step2 Detach the PCB assembly  in out  from the metallic mounting flange     Installing the Instrument    Step 3    MSL Cable Termination    the following wiring schematic  where each color corresponds to a number        NOTE    Use the Insertion Tool  M3086 43801  to position each wire on the PCB according    The Insertion Tool should be set to cutting mode 9            The Insertion Tool automatically  removes the insulation at the connection site  clamps the wire in the correct position  and cuts    off the excess wire                                                                                                                    
272. ure difference is less than 120  mmHg  the pump is not strong enough and should be replaced  irrespective of the  Pump OpTime      Flow Rate Check and Calibration  Check the flow rate in the sidestream CO  Extension as follows   Step 1 Connect the flowmeter to the CO  FilterLine     Step 2 Check on the flowmeter the flow that the sidestream CO  Extension Pump draws   x5   It should be 50 ml min   7 5 ml min  If the value is within tolerance  proceed  to the CO  Gas calibration check  If the value is not within tolerance  calibrate as  follows     Step3 Adjust the flow in the Instrument by selecting    Increase Flow  or    Decrease Flow   until it is as close as possible to 50 ml per minute as indicated on the flowmeter  gauge     Step 4 When you are satisfied that the flow is set as close as possible to 50 ml per minute   select  Store Flow  and confirm the setting   NOTE If the adjusted flow is not stored within 60 seconds of the adjustment  the old flow setting  will be restored    If the flow cannot be adjusted to within tolerance  the pump should be replaced  If the flow  adjustment still cannot be made  this indicates a fault in the M3015A Measurement  Extension  which must be replaced     Testing the Instrument 151    Preventive Maintenance Tests    152    Noise Check   Step 1 Check that the Monitor is in Service Mode and in the CO  window    Step 2 Disconnect the flowmeter and connect the 5  calibration gas and flow regulator in  its place    Step 3 Open the valve to a
273. used  COM1 or COM2  in the Select Serial Port field  by clicking in the circle preceding the appropriate port     Step 7 Select the appropriate Device to Configure in the drop down list in the  Configuration Tool window of the configuring PC  See previous figure     Step8 Select the file tools ConfigTool WB_WirelessM3_1 2b15 cfg in the  Configuration File fields   NOTE If this file does not automatically appear in the Configuration File field  click Browse and  find this file on the computer drive directory where it was stored     Step 9 Turn OFF the power of the Wireless M3 M4 Monitor and disconnect any cable  connected to the RJ 45 port on its rear panel     82 Installing the Instrument    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    Step 10 Unsnap the gray cover on the upper right side of the M3 M4 Monitor housing to  expose the female stereo phono plug on the Wireless Adapter  as shown in the next  figure        Step 11 Connect the phono plug end of the 9 Pin D female   1 8 in  male Stereo Phono cable  into the phono plug connector on the Wireless Adapter as shown above and the 9   pin D end of the cable into the 9 Pin D Serial Port connector on the configuring PC     Step 12 Turn ON the M3 M4 Monitor and insure that it passes its self test     Step 13 Select the WB_WirelessM3_1 2b15 cfg item in the drop down list in the  Configuration Tool window     Installing the Instrument 83    Installation of Wireless Infrastructure    NOTE    84    Step 14 Click OK to open the Wirele
274. v  Passwords  142  patient   leakage current  64   name  10   safety  64  Patient safety checks  159  performance  iv  Performance Assurance Test  143  Power On Test  142  Power Supply related problems  188  PRESS   zero button  7  Press   performance check  156  Press Temp  Extension  45  53  Pressure   theory of operation  37  Pressure Zero  amp  Check Cal message  210  Preventative Maintenance  123  Preventive Maintenance Tests  146  printer   connecting  95    port  5  selecting  93  Printer Connection  troubleshooting  214  Printer Manager  14  protection class  IEC 601 1  class 1   64  protective earth  64  protective grounding  64  Pump  replacement  125    Q    Quick Link connector  6  7  92    R    Recorder   troubleshooting  195  reliability  iv  Remedy  183  Removing the Backlight Tubes  226  230  Removing the Battery  221  Removing the Chassis  222  Removing the Connector Board  228  Removing the LCD Assembly  226  Removing the Power Supply  221  Removing the Speaker  229  Removing the System Board  224  repairs  iv  Reset PumpOpTime  208  RESP EQUIP MALF message  210  Revision Screen  209    S    safety  iv  patient  64  Safety Analyzer  159  Safety Tests  Procedures  159  Serial Numbers  142  SERVERLINK MALF  INOP description  179  Service Mode  206  setting  default  10  Setup button  5  Sidestream CO  Measurement  48  Sidestream CO   Performance Test  148  Silence Reset button  5  7  Site Preparation Guideline  97  214  215  SmartKey  label  10  software updat
275. verted into digital data  and  processed before being communicated to the Monitor  Server extension devices are referred  to as the Measurement Server Extensions or simply Extensions in this manual     The M3046A Compact Portable Patient Monitor receives the processed data from the  Measurement Server and the Measurement Server Extension  examines it for alarm  conditions  and displays it  The Monitor also provides operating controls for the user  and  interfaces to other devices  This monitoring device is referred to as the Monitor in this  manual     The M3080A  C32 12V adapter allows use of a vehicle power supply for the instrument and    the M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner allows the recharging and conditioning of  batteries of the instrument     Introduction to the Instrument 3    Instrument Components    Instrument Components    The Monitor  the Measurement Server  and Measurement Server Extensions are shown in the  following diagram     Measurement Server  M3000A and M3001A     M3000A has a  gray bezel   M3001A has a    white bezel        Measurement Server  Extensions    M3016A M3015A       Monitor  M3046A        Functional descriptions of these components are to be found later in this chapter     4 Introduction to the Instrument    A Quick Description of the Monitor    A Quick Description of the Monitor    Front Panel Keys           Alarm Alarm Suspend   Indicator Key  amp  Indicator Setup Main Screen  Alarm Key Ke  Silence Reset Key   On Off Standby  Battery 
276. wing are correct statements according to the warnings   cautions and safety procedures in this chapter     a  Do not perform any disassembly procedures other than Server and Extension  removal with power applied to the Instrument     b  High voltages are present on the Power Supply board for up to 20 seconds after  disconnecting the mains power cord     c  Never insert a battery without the Power Supply board being present     d       of the above are correct according to this  chapter     Question 3  What must be removed to access the fuse     a  When accessing the fuse  all Instrument assemblies must be removed     b  When accessing the fuse  the Server  the Extension  the battery  and the Power  Supply must be removed     c  When accessing the fuse  the battery compartment cover and the battery must be  removed     Repairing the Instrument 243    Answers to Tutorial for Repairing the Instrument    Answers to Tutorial for Repairing the Instrument    1  c   See pages 222  231 and 245 for more details    2  d   See pages 219 and 220 for more details      3  b   See page 221 for more details      244 Repairing the Instrument    7   Replacement Parts       Objectives    After reading this chapter  you will be able to identify the replaceable components and know  which subassemblies you can order for the Instrument     The Instrument is comprised of several components which may be replaced or exchanged if  they break  This chapter provides you with exploded views and part number
277. xygen saturation value and the pulse  rate  along with a real time wave for the plethysmogram     SpO  PLETH Features    This illustration shows the user controls and connector for the SpO  PLETH  The parts are  described following the illustration below     This is a standard 8 pin  connector for use with an  SpO   PLETH transducer        Safety    To ensure the safety of the patient  the patient applied part is isolated from ground by opto   couplers and a transformer  The circuit is also encapsulated in plastic     PLETH Wave    The circuit automatically and continuously adjusts the size of the wave  which represents the  quality of the SpO  measurement signals  Manual wave adjustments in this mode are not  possible  If the signal quality becomes weak  the wave becomes progressively smaller  If the  signal degrades below an acceptable level  the wave becomes flat and an INOP alarm results   A poor signal may be caused by poor perfusion at the transducer site  or by the transducer  it  is not related to low oxygen saturation     Introduction to the Instrument 33    Arterial Oxygen Saturation and Pleth  SpO  PLETH  Measurement    34    This illustration contains an example of a typical wave in SpO          Pleth                Block Diagram of the SpO  PLETH Circuit                      Self Test Signal    v            Clipping    Y Detector                   Q   Digital CPU 5   photo   Photo Variable   5  current  Amplifier Gain ADC Signal ROM RAM  A  Processor     A 5   E 
278. y   starts or stops NBP  measurements     Blue SpO  connector Either   NBP STAT key   starts NBP STAT series of    measurements     07    Zero key   initiates a zero procedure for the    connected pressure transducer when pressed and held  for a second     EN Red NBP connector 8   Alarm Silence Reset    Combined pressure  red  and temperature  brown  MSL cable connector to the monitor   connector   connect either invasive pressure   transducer or temperature probe  M3000A  C06    M3001A  C06 and    18 only      Press and temp cannot be used at the same time     You might have a version of the Measurement Server  that does not have this connector        8 Introduction to the Instrument    A Quick Description of the Measurement Server Extension    A Quick Description of the Measurement Server  Extension    Overview of the Measurement Server Extensions M3015A  amp   M3016A    Catches for  wy attaching the  i  Measurement    Server    Connectors Qus  to Monitor  amp     Measurement  Server           Measurement     7 Connectors    Measurement Connectors for the M3015A Measurement Server  Extension    Press Note     Press and Temp  M3015A  C06 only   Temp cannot be used at the same time on  the same Extension          gas inlet    IDESTREAM CO     gas outlet  exhaust     Introduction to the Instrument 9    A Quick Description of the        Screen    Measurement Connectors for the M3016A Measurement Server  Extension    Note    Press and Temp cannot  be used at the same time  on th
279. y  209    M    M3000A Measurement Connectors  7  M3015A   Measurement Connectors  9   Theory of Operation  45  M3016A   measurement connectors  10   theory of operation  53  Main Screen button  5  Mainstream CO    Performance Test  157  Mainstream        Measurement  56  Maintenance   Frequency  120   NBP calibration and   tests  123   preventive  123  Maintenance Checklist  121  marker pulse  ECG   67  MEAS SERV UNPLUGGED   INOP description  178  measurement connector  7  Measurement extensions   description and features  44  Measurement Server   description  19   theory of operation  21  measurement server   connecting  71   connector  6  7  92   mounting  6  92  Measurement Server LEDs   troubleshooting  172  modifications  iv  Monitor    performance    276    hardware functional description  16  Rear Panel  6  theory of operation  11  Monitor Revisions Screen  209  monitor  overview  3  11  mounting  measurement server  6  92  monitor  6  92  mounting options  63    N    NBP  Accuracy Test  146  Leakage Test  147  Linearity Test  148  start stop button  7  valve test  148  Non invasive Blood Pressure  NBP  Mod   ules  Block Diagram  31  Components  31  Description  29  Features  29  NPB Modes  30  Safety  30  Measurements  29  Theory of Operation  32  numeric  10  numeric label  10  nurse call  connector  6  92  Nurse Call Relay  connecting  76  modification  76  Performance Test  157          On Off Standby button  5    P    Parts   listing  247  parts and accessories  i
280. y to complete when you follow the step by step procedures in this chapter     The main replaceable parts of the M8043A Battery Charger and Conditioner are       The Air Filters  left hand and right hand     The Cooling Fans  left hand and right hand     Follow the step by step removal and replacement procedures starting on page 239   The M3000A and M3001A Measurement Servers and the extensions M3016A and M3015A     serial number prefix DE435xxxxx only  cannot be repaired and must be exchanged if  defective     Concepts    Before starting disassembly of the Monitor  remove the rubber bezel protector  if fitted   Disassembly Disassembly refers to the removal of cover  chassis and other parts in order    to access and replace parts in the M3046A Monitor and the M3015A  Measurement Server Extension  Disassembly does not refer to a complete    Repairing the Instrument 219    Warnings  Cautions and Safety Precautions    breakdown of the entire Instrument since the Measurement Server and the  M3016A Measurement Server Extension cannot be disassembled     High Voltage This concept refers to voltages dangerous to life  High voltages can be found  in the Instrument when it 1  connected to the mains Power Supply and in the  capacitors on the Power Supply board even when the Instrument is not  connected to the mains Power Supply     Warnings  Cautions and Safety Precautions     Do NOT disassemble the product past the point described in these procedures      High Voltage Warning    Voltag
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Sanyo SC-15(M) User's Manual  Samsung GT-C3780 Manuel de l'utilisateur  - 1 - ES DE FR GB IT NL General information  Belkin Pre-N F5D8230-4/F5D8010 Kit (F5D82304F5D8010)  Samsung DVD-AR650 User's Manual  Samsung S23A750D Manual de utilizare  701187 Rev E - Straight Elbow Wrap Use Guide WB 1x  Keys and Remotes  Losetas de porcelana de cuerpo delgado  operating instructions and service manual horse auction board    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file